PE 1111 

,W622 
Copy 1 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 



A TEl 5f 11 afr 



fa __ . 

_ UNITED STATES OP AMERICA. _ 



THE 



PARSER'S MANUAL: 



EMBRACING 



CLASSIFIED EXAMPLES IN NEARLY EVERY VARIETY OF ENG- 
LISH CONSTRUCTION : DESIGNED FOR SCHOOLS AND 
FOR THE USE OF PRIVATE STUDENTS; 



By 



^COPYRIGh 



^ No - : 



JOHN WILLIAMS, A.M. 



PUBLISHERS : 
WILSON, HINKLE & CO., 

CINCINNATI: NEW YOEK: 

137 ^T^J^XiiTTJT ST. 28 BOZLsTID STBEET. 



/ &// 



T£hh 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 187f, by 

WILSON, HINKLE & CO., 
In the office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



ELECTROTYPED AT THE 

FRANKLIN TYPE FOUNDRY, 

CINCINNATI, O. 



PREFACE. 



The text-books of English Grammar are universally deficient in 
two particulars : the first is, that the parsing exercises are not suffi- 
ciently varied ; and the second is, that the exercises lack in point 
of copiousness. Difficult constructions are often left unnoticed ; 
important principles are frequently illustrated hy only a single 
example, and that not. designed to be parsed; and when a formal 
exercise in parsing is given, the examples are hardly ever suffi- 
ciently numerous. 

As a consequence of this paucity of examples in the text-books, 
and the deficiency in drill resulting therefrom, students generally 
fail to become adepts in this department of learning. But few of 
the pupils in our best taught schools ever acquire the ability to 
tell, in many instances, to what part of speech a word in a given 
sentence belongs. There is not one in a hundred of those who have 
graduated in the study of English Grammar, that can recognize 
adjectives with certainty when they stand immediately after the 
nouns to which they relate. There is not one in a thousand who 
ever masters the subject of the participles, or becomes familiar with 
the subjunctive and infinitive modes in all their phases. The list 
of prepositions being small, most students learn to call at sight the 
more common words belonging to this part of speech ; but there is 
hardly one in ten thousand who can distinguish a preposition by 
its office, or who, when he meets with an unusual preposition, will 
recognize it as belonging to this class of words. 

To the very important and extensive subject of ellipsis, authors 
commonly devote about the third of a page, in which space they 

(3) 



4 PREFACE. 

define the term, and give four or five examples. It is, therefore, 
not to be wondered at that hardly one student in a hundred thou- 
sand becomes able to supply words that are understood with a tol- 
erable degree of readiness and correctness. 

That our students of grammar are thus deficient is not altogether 
the fault of their teachers ; for grammar can not be thoroughly 
taught without the use of a well-digested system of printed or 
written parsing exercises. Nor is it the fault of the authors who 
have prepared our text-books in grammar. We have many excel- 
lent treatises which are all that a text-book in grammar ought to 
be. The introduction into a text-book of such an amount of drill 
exercises as would be necessary to make learners perfectly familiar 
with the parsing and analysis of all kinds of sentences, would either 
make a volume too large to be conveniently handled, or it would 
crow d out every thing else that should find a place in a text-book 
on grammar. It is, therefore, indispensably necessary that we 
should have a book specially devoted to the subject of parsing. 

The present volume is designed to be a companion of any of the 
text-books used in our schools. It is not intended that the articles 
shall be taken up and studied consecutively in the order in which 
they stand in the book, but that such articles shall be taken up, or 
referred to from day to day, as will serve to impress more deeply 
on the minds of the pupils the lesson of their text-book. 

The author would suggest that in going over an example parsed 
as a " model," the members of the class should close their books. 
It would not be advisable that every word of a sentence should 
always be parsed, but only so much of the sentence as serves to 
illustrate the rule or principle under consideration. Neither would 
it always be expedient to parse all the examples belonging to any 
particular section or sub-section. 

The author would advise that, in parsing, the pupils should 
apply the rules of their text-books. 



SYNOPSIS. 



PAGE 

Article I. — Infinitives used as Nouns • ... 13 

Article II. — Participles used as Nouns . . . . 16 

Article III. — Adjectives used as Nouns .... 24 

Article IV. — Words used as Nouns, independently of their 

meaning 28 

Article V. — Phrases used as Nouns . . . .28 

Article VI. — Sentences used as Nouns .... 34 

Article VII. — Proper and Common Nouns distinguished 39 

Article VIII. — Compound Nouns . . . . . 41 

Article IX. — Collective Nouns 47 

Article X. — Personification 52 

Article XI. — Pronouns 59 

Article XII. — Adjectives 82 

Article XIII. — Participles 100 

Article XIV. — Verbs 115 

Article XV. — Adverbs 141 

Article XVL— Prepositions . . . ... .152 

Article XVII.— Conjunctions 162 

Article XVIII.— The Nominative Cnse Independent . 170 

Article XIX.— Apposition 178 

Article XX.— The same Case after a Verb as before it . 196 

(5) 



6 SYNOPSIS. 

PAGE 

Article XXI. — The same word used as different parts of 

speech . . . . . . .... 202 

Article XXII. — Transposition 225 

Article XXIII.— Ellipsis . ... . .236 

Article XXIV. — The Possessive Case .... 256 

Article XXV. — A Noun singular preceded by two or 

more Adjectives connected by and .... 258 

Article XXVI. — Primary and Attributive Objects . . 259 

Article XXVII. — The Objective Case after Passive Verbs 260 

Article XXVIII.— The Infinitive Attribute ... 260 
Article XXIX. — Infinitives following the Correlatives 

so .... as . . . 261 

Article XXX. — Infinitives preceded by the Correlatives 

other .... than 261 

Article XXXI. — Interjections . . 262 

Article XXXIL— Words used as Substitutes for Sentences 26 
Article XXXIII. — The use of present will, past would, as 

a Principal Verb 264 

Article XXXIV. — Infinitives used abstractly . . . 264 



6 



THE RULES OF SYNTAX. 



Rule I. — A noun or personal pronoun used to explain 
a preceding noun or pronoun, is put by apposition in the 
same case. (See Examples in Article XIX.) 

Rule II. — A noun or pronoun in the possessive case 
is governed by the noun denoting the thing possessed. 

Note l.~ When two or more possessives refer conjointly to the 
same thing, the sign of possession is used only in the last. (See 
Examples in Article XXIV, 1, a.) 

Note 2. — When two or more possessives refer separately to the 
thing possessed, the sign must be used in each. (See Examples in 
Article XXIV, 1, b.) 

Note 3. — When the governing noun is expressed, the possessive 
in apposition has the sign expressed, and the noun with which the 
possessive is in apposition omits the sign. (See Examples in Arti- 
cle XXIV, 2, a.) 

Note 4. — When the governing noun is understood, a possessive 
in apposition with a preceding noun omits the sign, and the pre- 
ceding noun has the sign expressed. (See Examples in Article 
XXIV, 2, b.) 

Note 5. — When a noun denoting occupation, office, etc., is in 
apposition with a preceding noun or pronoun in the possessive, 
if the governing noun is understood, the noun in apposition omits 
the sign. (See Examples in Article XXIV, 2, c.) 

Rule III. — Transitive verbs in the active voice govern 
the objective case. 

(7) 



8 THE RULES OF SYNTAX. 

State 1. — The transitive verbs to call, to name, and the like, gov- 
ern two objectives denoting the same person or thing, the one being 
called the primary, and the other the attributive object. (See Ex- 
amples in Article XXVI, 1.) 

"Note 2. — A transitive verb sometimes governs the subject of an 
infinitive as a primary object, and the infinitive itself as an attribu- 
tive object. (See Examples in Article XXVI, 2.) 

Note S. — The passive verbs to be asked, to be taught, and a few 
others, are sometimes followed by the objective case. (See Exam- 
ples in Article XXVII.) 

Kule IV. — Prepositions govern the objective case. 

Utile V. — A noun or pronoun is in the nominative 
case independent, when its case depends on no other 
word. 

Note 1. — When a noun is of the second person, it is in the nom- 
inative case independent by way of address. (See Examples in 
Article XVIII, 1.) 

Note 2. — When the name of an object is uttered without connec- 
tion with other words, to give expression to some emotion of the 
mind, it is in the nominative case independent by way of exclama- 
tion. (See Examples in Article XVIII, 3.) 

Note 3. — When a noun in the nominative case is not the subject 
of any verb, but is represented by a pronoun which is the subject 
of the next verb, the noun is in the nominative case independent by 
way of pleonasm. (See Examples in Article XVIII, 4.) 

Note 4. — A noun written on any object as its name, is in the 
nominative case independent by way of inscription. (See Exam- 
ples in Article XVIII, 5.) 

Note 5. — When a noun associated with a participle or infinitive 
is, in construction, independent of the sentence with which it is 
connected by location, it is in the nominative case absolute. (See 
Examples in Article XVIII, 6; and in Article V, 1 and 3.) 

Itwle VI. — Pronouns must agree with their iinteced- 
ents in person, number, and gender. (See Examples 
in Article XI.) 



THE RULES OF SYNTAX. 9 

Note 1. — A pronoun representing two or more antecedents taken 
together, must be of the plural number. (See Examples in Article 
XI, 6.) 

Note 2. — If the antecedents are singular, and refer to the same 
person or thing, the pronoun must be singular. (See Examples in 
Article XI, 6, c.) 

Note 3. — A pronoun referring separately to two or more antece- 
dents in the singular, must be in the singular. (See Examples in 
Article XI, 7.) 

Note 4. — If the antecedents are of different persons, the pronoun 
must agree with the second in preference to the third, and with the 
first in preference either to the second or to the third. (See Exam- 
ples in Article XI, 6, b.) 

Note 5. — If a pronoun refer to two or more antecedents, one of 
the antecedents being feminine, and the other antecedent or ante- 
cedents being masculine, the pronoun must be parsed as masculine. 
(See Examples in Article XI, 6.) 

Note 6. — If the antecedent is a collective noun conveying the 
idea of plurality, the pronoun must be plural. 

Rule VII* — Adjectives qualify nouns and pronouns. 

Note 1. — An adjective sometimes qualifies another adjective. 
(See Examples in Article XII, 7, g.) 

Note 2. — An adjective may qualify a noun and adjective taken 
together. (See Examples in Article XII, 4.) 

Note 3. — An adjective may qualify both the verb and its subject 
at the same time. (See Examples in Article XII, 5.) 

Note 4. — Adjectives involving the idea of unity should be fol- 
lowed by singular nouns, and those involving the idea of plurality 
should be followed by plural nouns. 

Remark 1. — The adjectives requiring singular nouns are the 
distributives each, every, either, neither ; the demonstratives this and 
that ; the indefinites a or an and another, and all denoting quantity; 
the ordinals first, second, third, etc., and the cardinal one. 

Remark 2. — The adjectives sundry, divers, various, several, and 
the cardinals two, three, four, etc., and all denoting number, require 
nouns in the plural. 



10 THE RULES OF SYNTAX. 

Note 5. — When the basis of a substantive phrase consists of an 
infinitive or participle of an intransitive or passive verb, and of an 
adjective following the infinitive or participle, the adjective is used 
abstractly. (See Examples in Article V, 2 and 4.) 

Remark. — An adjective or noun is said to be used abstractly 
when it is the implied attribute of some indefinite subject. (See 
Examples in Article XII, 2, c.) "*» 

Mule VIII. — A noun or pronoun which is the subject 
of a finite verb must be in the nominative case. 

Mule IXo — A finite verb must agree with its subject 
in number and person. 

Note 1. — Verbs having two or more subjects taken together, and 
not signifying the same thing, must be in the plural number. (See 
Examples in Article XIV, 12, a.) 

Note 2. — If the nominatives are in the singular number, and 
mean the same person or thing, the verb must be in the singular. 
(See Examples in Article XIV, 12, b.) 

Note 3. — If the nominatives are in the singular, and are consid- 
ered separately in reference to the verb, the verb must be in the 
singular number. (See Examples in Article XIV, 12, c.) 

Note 4. — If a verb preceded by two or more nominatives, taken 
separately, refer to one of the nominatives, and not to the others, 
it must be parsed as agreeing with the nominative to which it refers, 
and the verb, in the proper person and number, must be supplied 
after each of the other nominatives. (See Examples in Article 
XIV, 12, d.) 

Note 5. — When two or more nominatives of different persons are 
connected by and, the verb prefers the second person to the third, 
and the first person to either the second or the third. (See Exam- 
ples in Article XIV, 12, e.) 

Note 6. — If nominatives of different persons are connected by or 
or nor, the verb must agree with the nominative which stands next 
to it. (See Examples in Article XIV, 12, f.) 

Note 7. — If the subject be a collective noun conveying the idea 
of plurality, the verb must be plural. (See Examples in Article 
IX, 1.) 



THE RULES OF SYS TAX. 11 

STote 8. — If the subject be a collective noun conveying unity of 
idea, the verb must be singular. (See Examples in Article IX, 2.) 

Rule X. — An intransitive or passive verb may have 
the same case after it as before it, when both words refer 
to the same person or thing. (See Examples in Article 

XX.) 

3Tote. — When the basis of a substantive phrase consists of an in- 
finitive or participle of an intransitive or passive verb, and of a 
noun or pronoun following the infinitive or participle, the noun or 
pronoun is in the nominative case, and is used abstractly. 

OTHERWISE. 

A noun or pronoun used as in the foregoing note may be parsed 
as being in the nominative absolute. 

Mule XI. — An infinitive or participle generally re- 
lates to some noun or pronoun as its subject. 

Xote 1. — An infinitive or participle is sometimes used independ- 
ently. 

Note 2. — To, the sign of the infinitive, is omitted after the verbs 
bid, dare, let, and some others. (See Examples in Article XXIII, 

25.) 

Note 3. — Verbs in the infinitive are sometimes used abstractly. 
(See Examples in Article XXXIV.) 

Remark. — Verbs in the infinitive are used abstractly when they 
follow the participle or infinitive of an intransitive or passive 
verb. 

Note 4. — Infinitives following passive verbs which in the active 
voice may govern an infinitive as an attributive object, also infini- 
tives following the intransitive verbs to be, to seem, to appear, and 
some others, are called the infinitive attribute. (See Examples in 
Article XXVIII.) 

Rule XII. — Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and 
other adverbs. (See Examples in Article XV.) 

Rule XIII. — Conjunctions connect words, phrases, 
and sentences. 



12 THE RULES OE SYNTAX. 

Mule XI V. — An interjection has no grammatical re- 
lation to other words in a sentence. 

ABBEEVIATIONS. 

N., noun; adj., adjective ; pron., pronoun ; v., verb ; adv., adverb; 
prep., preposition; conj., conjunction; com., common; prop., proper; 
masc, masculine gender; fern., feminine gender; neut., neuter gen- 
der; sing., singular number; plu., plural number; noni., nominative 
case; poss., possessive case; obj., objective case; ind., indicative 
mode; subj., subjunctive mode; inf., infinitive mode; pres., present 
tense ; 1st, first person ; 2d, second person ; 3d, third person ; 
comp., compound. 

Explanation. — The brackets [ ] indicate the position of an 
ellipsis. 



THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 



ARTICLE I. 



INFINITIVES USED AS NOUNS. 
Section 1. 

An infinitive may be used as a noun in the nominative 
case, and be the subject of a 'proposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. To err is human (a). 2. To forgive is divine. 
3. To see the sun is pleasant. 4. To break a promise 
is dishonorable. 5. To lie is a sin (b). 6. To steal is 
a crime. 7. To love our enemies is a Christian duty 
(c). 8. To do unto others as we would that they should 
do unto us is the golden rule. 9. To be ridiculed is 
unpleasant. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) To err is a verb, regular, intransitive, infinitive, present. 
It is here used as a noun of the neuter gender, third person, singu- 
lar number, nominative case, and subject of the verb is. — Rule 
VIII. 

Is is a verb, irregular, intransitive, indicative, present, third per- 
son, and singular number, to agree with its subject to err. — Rule 
IX. 

(13) 



14 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Human is an adjective, not compared, and qualifies the subject 
to err.— Eule VII. 

(6) Sin is a noun, neut., 3d, sing., and nom. after is, because it 
refers to the same thing with the subject to lie. — Kule X. 

(c) To love is a verb, reg., trans., inf., pres., and is here used as 
a noun ; com., neut., 3d, sing., nom., and is the subj. of the verb is. — 
Eule VIII. 

Duty is a noun, etc., in the nom. after is, referring to the same 
thing with the subj. to love. — Rule X. 



Section 2. 

An infinitive may be used as a noun in the predicate 
nominative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. My intention is to return (a). 2. My hope is to 
succeed. 3. His aim is to excel. 4. His wish is to be 
relieved. 5. His delight is to do good. 6. Where is 
the child that would willingly forget the most tender of 
parents, though to remember be but to lament? 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) To return is a verb, reg., intrans., inf., pres. ; used as a 
noun, etc., and nom. after the verb is, referring to the same thing 
with the subj. intention. — Rule X. 

Section 3. 

An infinitive may be used as a noun in the objective 
case, governed by a transitive verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Children love to play (a). 2. John desires to 
learn. 3. Thomas neglected to study his lesson. 4. 
James asked to be excused. 5. The vessel attempted to 



INFINITIVES USED AS NOUNS. 15 

run the blockade. 6. The wind began to blow. 7. One 
must begin to love somewhere, and to do good some- 
where. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) To play is a verb, etc. ; inf., pres. ; used as a noun, etc. ; obj., 
and governed by love. — Rule III. 



Section 4. 

An infinitive may be used as a noun in the objective 
case, governed by a 'preposition. 



EXAMPLES. 

1. We are liable [to] to be disappointed (a). 2. He 
is certain [of] to be disappointed (6). 3. He has a de- 
sire [for] to excel. 4. The means [ ] to accomplish the 
end were wanting. 5. Pytheas is come [ ] to die, and 
to redeem his friend. — Translated from Fenelon. 
6. On the day of her death, Lord Guilford asked per- 
mission [ ] to see her. 7. I return [ ] to suffer, though 
I do not deserve death. — Translated from Fenelon. 
8. He who is accustomed [ ] to turn aside from the 
world, and [ ] to commune with himself, will sometimes 
hear truths which the multitude do not tell him. 



MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) To be disappointed is a verb, etc. ; inf., pres. ; used as a 
noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by the preposition to understood. — 
Rule IV. 

OTHERWISE. 

Supply an ellipsis and read thus : " We are liable [to this thing, 
namely,] to be disappointed ;" and parse to be disappointed as a noun 
in the objective case, and put in apposition with thing understood. — 
Rule I. 



16 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 



ARTICLE II. 



PAETICIPLES USED AS NOUNS. 
Section 1. 

The present active participle may be used as a noun in 
the nominative case, and be the subject of a proposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Singing strengthens the voice (a). 2. Walking is 
a healthful exercise. 3. Yawning is contagious. 4. 
Lying is a mean vice. 5. Loving all fulfills the divine 
law (b). 6. The forgiving of one's enemies is enjoined 
by the Savior. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Singing is the present active participle of the irregular in- 
transitive verb to sing, and is here construed as a noun, neut., 3d, 
sing., and nora. case to the verb strengthens. — Rule VIII. 

(b) liOving is the pres. act. participle of the reg. trans, verb to 
love, and is here construed as a noun, etc., and is the subj. of the 
verb fulfills.— Rule VIII. 

All is a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by the participle loving. — 
Rule III. 

Section 2. 

The present active participle may be used as the nom- 
inative after the verb to be. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Love is the fulfilling of the law (a). 2. Seeing 
is believing. 3. Analysis is a separating or taking 
apart (6). 4. Friction is the rubbing of bodies together. 



PARTICIPLES USED AS NOUNS. 17 

5. Congelation is the solidifying of liquids by cold. 

6. Combustion is the consuming of bodies by fire. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Fulfilling is the pres. active participle of the reg. trans, 
verb to fulfill, and is here construed as a noun in the nom. case after 
the intrans. verb is. — Eule X. 

(b) Talting apart is the pres. act. participle of the irreg. 
trans, compound verb to take apart, and has here the construction 
of a noun in the nom. after is. — Rule X. 

Section 3. 

Tlie present active participle may be used as a noun in 
the objective case, governed by a transitive verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The farmer has commenced the cutting of his corn 
(a). 2. The merchant has finished the invoicing of his 
goods. 3. The carelessness of the engineer caused the 
bursting of the boiler. 4. The skill of the pilot pre- 
vented the wrecking of the vessel. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Cutting is the pres. act. participle of the irreg. trans, verb 
to cut, and is used here as a noun, neut., 3d, sing., obj., and gov- 
erned by has commenced. — Rule III. 

Section 4. 

The present active participle may be used as a noun in 
the objective case, governed by a preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The pupils are engaged in studying their lessons 
(a). 2. The farmers are occupied in cutting their corn. 
P. M.-2. 



18 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

3. Temperance, by fortifying the mind and body, leads 
to happiness ; intemperance, by enervating them, ends 
generally in misery. — Blair. 4. I am far from advising 
any measure that would, in future, endanger the state. — 
Lord Mansfield. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Studying is the present active participle of the reg. trans, 
verb to study. It is here used as a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed 
by the preposition in. — Rule IV. 

Lessons is a noun, etc. ; objective, and governed by the parti- 
ciple studying. — Rule III. 

Section 5. 

The perfect active 'participle may be used as a noun in 
the nominative case. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. His having left was unknown to me (a). 2. His 
having studied Latin facilitated his acquisition of the 
French (6). 3. His having neglected to improve his 
time and opportunities, while young, was a source of 
regret to him in after life. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Having left is the perf. act. part, of the irreg. intrans. 
verb to leave. It is here used as a noun, etc., in the nom., and subj. 
of the verb was. — Rule VIII. 

His is a pron., personal, 3d, sing., masc, poss., and is governed 
by the noun having left. — Rule II. 

Unknown is an adj., qualifying the noun having left. — Rule 
VII. 

(b) Latin is a noun, prop., neut., 3d, sing., obj., and governed 
by the participle having studied. — Rule ITT. 



PARTICIPLES USED AS NOUNS. 19 

Section 6. 

The perfect active participle may be used as a noun in 
the objective case, governed by a preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He was suspected of having corresponded (a) with 
the enemy. 

2. He was accused of having embezzled (6) the money 
(c) of the Government. 

3. We at length ended our distressful voyage by ar- 
riving at Naples, after having escaped a thousand dan- 
gers, both at sea and land. — Goldsmith. 

4. The jailer was not aware of the prisoner's (d) 
having escaped. 

5. I am not conscious of having neglected any duty. 

6. The conspirators were not suspicious of the Gov- 
ernment's having got information in regard to their 
plans. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Having corresponded is the 2d past part, of the reg. 
intrans. verb to correspond. It is used here as a noun, 3d, sing., 
neut., obj., and governed by of. — Eule IV. 

(6) Having embezzled is the 2d past part, of the reg. trans, 
verb to embezzle. It is here used as a noun, 3d, sing., neut., obj., and 
is governed by of. — Rule IV. 

(c) Money is a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by having embez- 
zled.— "Rule III. 

(d) Prisoner's is a noun, etc. ; poss., and governed by the par- 
ticipial noun having escaped. — Rule II. 

Section 7. 

The present passive participle may be used as a noun in the 
nominative case. 



20 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. His being provided with letters of introduction was 
an advantage to him (a). 2. His being discouraged was 
the cause of his abandoning the enterprise. 3. His being 
provided afresh with means enabled him to resume his 
business. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Being provide*! is the pres. pass. part, of the reg. trans, 
verb to provide. It is here used as a noun, neut., 3d, sing., nom., 
and is the subj. of the verb was. — Kule VIII. 

His is a pron., masc., 3d, sing., poss., and is governed by the 
noun being provided. — Rule II. 

Advantage is a noun, etc., in the nom. case after was, because 
it relates to the same thing with the noun being provided, which is 
also in the nom. case, and is the subj. of was. — Rule X. 



Section 8. 

The present passive participle may be used as a noun in the 
objective case, governed by a transitive verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1 . He could not help being discouraged by his repeated 
failures (a). 2. The careful guarding of the treasure 
prevented its being plundered. 3. Who, on contem- 
plating the close of life, can avoid being touched with 
sensations at once awful and tender? — Blair. 



MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Being discouraged is the pass. part, of the reg. trans, 
verb to discourage. It is here used as a noun, etc.; obj., and gov- 
erned by the trans, verb help. — Rule III. 



PARTICIPLES USED AS NOUNS, 21 

Section 9. 

Tlie present passive participle may be used as a noun in the 

objective case, governed by a preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Upon being dismissed, the scholars went home (a). 
2. Upon being provided with a light, we entered the 
cavern. 3. The health of the prisoners suffered in con- 
sequence of their not being provided with wholesome 
food. 4. The laborers complained of not being duly 
paid. 5. It is supposed that persons surfer no pain in 
being killed by lightning. 6. From not being properly 
cared for, the patient died (6). 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Being dismissed is the pre?, pass. part, of the reg. trans, 
verb to dismiss. It is here used as a noun, etc. ; obj., and is governed 
by the preposition upon. — Rule IV. 

(h) Being eared for is the pres. pass. part, of the reg. trans, 
compound verb to care for. It is here used as a noun, etc. ; obj., 
and governed by the preposition from. — Rule IV. 

Section 10. 

Tlie perfect passive participle may be used as a noun in the 
nominative case. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Its having been planted too late was the cause of 
the corn's not maturing (a). 2. The wall's having been 
poorly constructed was the cause of its falling. 3. His 
not having been provided with adequate means was the 
cause of his not succeeding in the enterprise. 4. The 
child's having been burned was the cause of his dreading 



22 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

the fire. 5. Their having been often deceived rendered 
them distrustful. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Having been planted is the perf. pass. part, of the reg. 
trans, verb to plant. It is here used as a noun, etc., in the nom. 
case, and is the subj. of was. — Rule VIII. 

Its is a pron., etc., agreeing with com as its antecedent — Rule 
VI ; and is in the poss. case, being governed by the noun having 
been planted. — Kule II. 

Cause is a noun, etc. ; nom. after was, because it relates to the 
same thing with the noun having been planted, which is the subj. of 
ivas. — Rule X. 

Section 11. 

The perfect passive participle mag be used as a noun in the 
objective case, governed by a preposition . 

EXAMPLES. 

1. On account of its having been planted too late, the 
corn did not mature (a). 2. In consequence of its not 
having been carefully built, the wall fell. ' 3. From its 
not having been properly prepared, the food was unpal- 
atable. 4. In consequence of his having been injured by 
a fall, he was unable to labor. 5. On account of his 
having been disabled by a wound, the soldier was dis- 
charged. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Having been planted is the perf. pass. part, of the reg. 
trans, verb to plant. It is here used as a noun, etc.; obj. case, and 
governed by the prep. of. — Kule IV. 



Section 12, 

The past participle passive may be used as a noun. 



PARTICIPLES USED AS NOUS& 23 

EXAMPLES. 

1. They press the besieged (a) hard upon the outer 
wall. — Scott. 

2. The departed ! (6) the departed ! 

They visit us in dreams, 
And they glide above our memories, 
Like shadows over streams. 

3. The killed in the battle numbered one thousand, 
and the wounded six thousand. 

4. America has been called the asylum of the oppressed. 

5. Where a contagious disease prevails, the infected 
should be separated from the healthy. 

6. The inhabitants of heaven are called the blest. 

7. The wounded were left exposed to the keen night 
air on the frozen ground. 

8. The persecuted are apt to become persecutors them- 
selves when they gain the power. 

9. We should endeavor to relieve the sufferings of the 
afflicted. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Besieged is the 1st past part. pass, of the reg. trans, verb 
to besiege. It is here used as an adj., to qualify the noun men under- 
stood.— Rule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Besieged i* a participial adj. used as a noun, com., 3d, plu., 
masc, obj., and governed by the verb press. — Rule III. 

(b) Departed is the 1st past part, of the reg. intrans. verb to 
depart. It is here used as an adj., to qualify the noun persons un- 
derstood. — Rule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Beparted is a participial adj. used as a noun, com., 3d, plu., 
masc, and in the nom. independent by way of pleonasm. — Rule V, 
Note 3. 

Remark. — Departed is not a passive participle, for the reason 
that to depart is an intransitive verb, and can, therefore, have no 
passive voice. 



24 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 



ARTICLE III. 



ADJECTIVES USED AS NOUNS. 
Section 1. 

Common adjectives used as nouns in the plural. 



EXAMPLES. 

I. The meek shall inherit the earth (a). 2. The pure 
in heart shall see God. 3. The wicked flee, when no 
man pursueth. 4. The righteous are as bold as a lion. 
5. The rich should help the poor. 6. The learned should 
instruct the ignorant. 7. The powerful should protect 
the weak. 8. The idle should not share the gains of the 
industrious. 9. The proud shall be abased. 10. The 
humble shall be exalted. 

II. The aged must die, and the young may die. 12. 
None but the brave deserve the fair. 13. God causes 
the sun to rise upon the evil and upon the good, and 
sends rain upon the just and upon the unjust. 14. The 
battle is not to the strong alone ; it is to the vigilant, the 
active, the brave. — Patrick Henry. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Meek is an adjective relating to the noun persons under- 
stood.— Kule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Meelc is an adj. used as a noun, com., 3d, plu., masc, nom., and 
subj. of shall inherit. — Kule VIII. 

Shall inherit is a verb, etc., agreeing either with meek as its 
subj., or with persons understood. — Rule IX. 



ADJECTIVES USED AS NOUNS. 25 

Section 2. 

Common adjectives used as nouns in the singular, and de- 
noting persons. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The wicked is snared in the transgression of his 
lips (a). 2. The wicked is driven away in his wicked- 
ness, but the righteous hath hope in his death. 3. The 
hand of the valiant shall bear rule. 4. The heart of the 
wise asketh instruction. 5. The hand of the diligent 
maketh rich. 6. The memory of the just shall be blessed, 
but the memory of the wicked shall rot. 7. The simple 
believeth every word. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Wiclted is an adjective qualifying the noun man, or person, 
understood. — Rule VIL 

Is snared is a verb ? etc., agreeing with its subj. person under- 
stood.— Eule IX. 

OTHERWISE. 

Wickec! is an adjective used as a noun, masc, 3d, sing., nom., 
and is the subj. of is snared. — Rule VIII. 

Is snared is a verb, etc., agreeing with its subject wicked in the 
third person singular. — Rule IX. 

Section 3, 

Common adjectives used as abstract nouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Longinus wrote a treatise on the sublime (a). 

2. It was a pageant rivaled in the elements of the 

grand and the pathetic only by the journey of our 

Washington. 3. We take our last leave of earth, and 

V. M.— 3. 



26 * THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

of our further voyage there is no witness but the Infinite 
and the Eternal. 4. The blue and the russet were pre- 
dominant. 5. There is but one step between the sublime 
and the ridiculous. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Sublime is an adj. used as an abstract noun. It is com., 
3d, sing., neut., obj., and is governed by the preposition on. — Eule 
IV. 

Section 4. 
Proper adjectives used as nouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Franklin was an American (a). 2. Demosthenes 
was an Athenian. 3. Hannibal was a Carthagenian. 
4. Scipio was a Koman. 5. The English are brave (b). 
6. The French are gay. 7. The Chinese are ingenious. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) American is a proper adjective qualifying the noun man 
understood. — Kule VII. 

Man understood is a noun, etc., and nom. after was. — Rule X. 

OTHERWISE. 

American is a noun, com., etc., and nom. after was. — Eule X. 

(6) English is a proper adjective qualifying the noun people 
understood. — Rule VII. 

Are is a verb, etc. ; 3d, plu., to agree with its subj. people under- 
stood.— Rule IX. 

OTHERWISE. 

English is a proper adj. used as a noun, com., masc, 3d, plu., 
nom., and subj. of are. — Rule VIII. 

Are is a verb, etc. ; 3d, plu., agreeing with its subj. English ex- 
pressed, or with people understood. 



ADJECTIVES USED AS NOUNS. 27 

Section 5. 

Numeral adjectives used as nouns. 

(a) Cardinal numerals. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Columbus discovered America in the year 1492 (a). 

2. The error may be found on page two hundred and 
forty-five. 3. We dine at twelve (b). 

MODELS FOR PARSING- 

(a) 1493 is a noun, prop., neut., 3d, sing., obj., and put in appo- 
sition with year. — .Rule I. 

(6) Twelve is a numeral adj. used as a noun, prop., neut., 3d, 
sing., obj., and governed by the prep. at. — Eule IV. 

(b) Ordinal numerals. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. George the Third reigned longer than any other 
English king (a). 2. Louis the Sixteenth was beheaded. 

3. Napoleon the First was a native of Corsica. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Third is a numeral adjective of the ordinal kind, and relates 
to king of that name understood. — Rule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Third is an ordinal numeral adjective used as a noun, prop., 
masc, 3d, sing., nom., and in apposition with George. — Rule I. 



28 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 



ARTICLE IV. 



WORDS USED AS NOUNS INDEPENDENTLY 
OF THEIR MEANING. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Us is a personal pronoun (a). 2. Is is an intransi- 
tive verb. 3. Is is an intransitive verb? 4. And is a 
conjunction. 5. The is the definite article. 6. Beautiful 
is an adjective. 7. Could have been is a verb in the poten- 
tial mode (h). 8. Harsh and hard-hearted are epithets 
allotted to the creditor (c). 

9. But most [ * ] by numbers judge a poet's song, 
And rough or smooth with them is right or wrong. 
* Supply persons. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Us is a noun, prop., neut., 3d, sing., nom., and subj. of the 
verb is. — Kule VIII. 

(6) Could have been is a noun, prop., neut., 3d, sing., and 
subj. of the verb is. — Kule VIII. 

(c) Harsh and hard-hearted are nouns, prop., neut., 3d, 
sing., and subjects of the verb are. — Eule VIII. 



ARTICLE V. 



PHKASES USED AS NOUNS. 
Section 1. 

Phrases consisting of the infinitive of an intransitive or 
passive verb, and of a noun following the infinitive. 



PHRASES USED AS NOUNS. 29 

EXAMPLES. 

1. To be a liar is mean (a). 2. To be a thief is 
criminal. 3. To become a scholar requires study. 4. 
He wishes to be chosen captain (6). 5. It was my lot 
to be taken prisoner. 6. To be an Englishman in 
London, a Frenchman in Paris, and a Spaniard in 
Madrid is no easy matter (c). 7. In that elder day, to 
be a Roman was greater than [ ] to be a king (d). 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) To be a liar is a phrase used as a noun, neut., 3d, sing., 
rtom., and subj. of the verb is. — Kule VIII. 

Is is a verb, etc., agreeing with the substantive phrase to be a liar 
as its subject. — Kule IX. 

Mean is an adj. qualifying the subj. to be a liar. — Rule VII. 

To be is a verb, irreg., intrans., inf., pres., and introduces the 
substantive phrase to be a liar. 

liiar is a noun, etc., used abstractly. — Rule X, Note. 

OTHERWISE. 

Parse liar as nom. absolute after to be. — Rule V, Note 5. 

(6) To be cbosen captain is a phrase used as a noun, etc. ; 
obj., and governed by wishes. — Rule III. 

OTHERWISE. 

Supply an ellipsis and read thus : " He wishes [for this thing, 
viz.,] to be chosen captain ;" and parse to be chosen captain as a noun 
in apposition with thing understood. 

(c) To be an Englishman, to be a Frenchman, and 

to be a Spaniard are phrases used as nouns, etc., each being 
a partial subj. of the verb is. The three taken together constitute 
a noun in the sing., nom., and subj. of the verb is. — Rule VIII. 

(d) Supply an ellipsis and read thus: u In that elder day, to be 
a Roman was greater than [it was great] to be a king." 

CJreatei* is an adj. qualifying the noun to be a Roman. —'Rule 
VII. 

To be a king is a phrase used as a noun, etc.; nom., and put 
in apposition with it. — Rule I. 



30 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 2. 

Phrases consisting of the infinitive of an intransitive or 
passive verb, and of an adjective following the infinitive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. To be good is to be happy (a). 2. His aim is to 
become rich. 3. To be insensible to the estimation in 
which we are held by others, indicates any thing rather 
than a good and generous spirit, — Hawes. 4. To be 
avaricious is sinful. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) To toe good is a phrase used as a noun, etc.; nom., and 
subj. of the verb is. — Kule VIII. 

Is is a verb, etc., agreeing with its subj. to be good. — Rule IX. 

To fee is a verb, etc. ; inf., pres., and introduces the substantive 
phrase to be good. 

CJoocI is an adj. used abstractly. — Rule VII, Note 5. 

To be happy is a phrase used as a noun, etc., and nom. after 
is. — Rule X. 

Section 3. 

Phrases consisting of a participle of an intransitive or 
passive verb, and of a noun or pronoun following the par- 
ticiple. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. His being an expert dancer is no recommendation 
(a). 2. Its being I needs make no difference. 3. His 
being a foreigner rendered him ineligible to the office. 
4. The atrocious crime of being a young man, I shall 
neither attempt to palliate nor to deny. — Pitt. 5. I have 
often thought of turning fortune-teller for a week or two 
myself. 6. He was pleased with being thought an elo- 
quent man. 



PHRASES USED AS NOUNS. 31 

7. That unlimited complaisance which on every occa- 
sion falls in with the opinions and manners of others, is 
so far from being a virtue that it is a vice and the parent 
of many vices. — Blair. 8. And save the kingdom of 
Numidia, which is your own property, from being the 
prey of violence, usurpation, and cruelty. — Trans, from 
Sallust. 9. At the same time, the dignity and intelli- 
gence of his air forbade the idea of his being either a 
barbarian or a lunatic. — Jane Taylor. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Being an expert dancer is a phrase used as a noun, 
etc. ; nom., and subj. of the verb is. — Rule VIII. 

Is is a verb, etc., agreeing with its subj. being an expert dancer. — 
Rule IX. 

Being is the pres. part, of the irreg. intrans. verb to be, and in- 
troduces the substantive phrase being an expert dancer. 

Dancer is a noun, etc. ; nom. case, and used abstractly. — Rule X, 
Note. 

OTHERWISE. 

Dancer is a noun, etc., in the nom. case absolute after being. — 
Rule V, Note 5. 

Section 4. 

Phrases consisting of the participle of an intransitive or 
passive verb, and of an adjective following the participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I was not aware of his being sick (a). 2. He 
could not wear the garment on account of its being too 
small. 3. Wax is softened by being made warm. 4. 
My being unwell obliged me to defer the journey. 5. 
Capacity is the abstract quality of being able to hold. 
6. The main secret of being sublime, is to say great 



32 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

things in few and plain words. 7. Being good and 
being called good are different things. 8. Let him who 
has never in his life done wrong, be allowed the privi- 
lege of remaining inexorable. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Being side is a phrase used as a noun, etc. ; obj., and gov- 
erned by the prep. of. — Kule IV. 

Being is the pres. part, of the intransitive verb to be, and intro- 
duces the substantive phrase being sick. 

Sick is an adj. used abstractly. — Eule VII, Note 5. 



Section 5. 

Phrases consisting of the preposition for, of the object of the 
preposition, and of an infinitive of which the object of for is 
the subject. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. It is natural for man to indulge in the illusions of 
hope (a.) — Patrick Henry. 

2. For a prince to be reduced by villainy to my dis- 
tressful circumstances, is calamity enough. — Trans, from 
Sallust. 

3. Nations were considered as natural enemies ; and 
for one people to plunder another by force of arms, and 
to lay waste their country, was no moral wrong, any 
more than for the tiger to devour the lamb. — Bashnell. 

4. Behold how good and how pleasant it is for brethren 
to dwell together in unity. — Psalm exxxiii : 1. 

5. Nothing remained but for the king to give his assent 
to the bill of attainder. — Goldsmith. 



PHRASES USED AS NOUNS. 33 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) For inaii to indulge is a phrase used as a noun, etc., in 
the nom. case, and put in apposition with it. — Rule I. 

For is a preposition serving to introduce the substantive phrase 
for man to indulge. 

3Ian is a noun, etc., and is the obj. of the prep, for, and the subj. 
of the infinitive to indulge. 

To indulge is a verb, inf., pres., and relates to man as its sub- 
ject. — Eule XI. 

Section 6. 

Irregular phrases used as nouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. "A present deity!" they shout around (a).— 
Dry den. 

2. Hark ! the notes on my ear that play, 
Are set to words ; as they float they say, 
"Passing away! passing away!" 

3. Let me see inscribed on the ensign of the Eepublic 
this sentiment: "Liberty and union, now and forever, 
one and inseparable!" (6). — Webster. 

4. He is seldom spoken of but with expressions of 
tenderness and compassion — "The poor debtor!" and 
"The unfortunate debtor!" (c). 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Deity is a noun, etc., in the nom. independent by way of 
exclamation. — Rule V, Note 2. 

The phrase a present deity is here used as a noun, etc.; obj., 
and governed by shout. — Rule III. 

(b) « Liberty and union, now and forever, one and 
inseparable' 9 is a noun, etc.; obj., and in apposition with senti- 
ment. 



34 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

^Liberty and union are in the nominative independent by 
inscription. 

One and inseparable are adjectives qualifying liberty and 
union. — Kule VII. 

(c) The phrases "the poor debtor" and "the unfortu- 
nate debtor" are nouns, prop., etc. ; obj., and put in apposition 
with expressions. — Rule I. 



ARTICLE VI. 



SENTENCES USED AS NOUNS. 
Section 1. 

A sentence used as a noun may be the subject nominative 
of a proposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. That you have wronged me doth appear in this 
(a). — Shakspeare. 2. That the earth is round is easily 
proved. 3. How he made his escape is a mystery. 

4. From what place he came can not be ascertained. 

5. Let me see the ensign of the Republic bearing no 
such miserable interrogatory as, What is all this worth? 
(b).— Webster. 6. When letters were invented is uncer- 
tain. 7. That my indiscretions should reach my pos- 
terity wounds me to the quick. — Goldsmith. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) That you have wronged me is a clause used as a 
noun ; neut., 3d, sing., nom., and the subj. of doth appear. — Eule 
VIII. 

Doth, appear is a verb, etc., agreeing with the noun that you 
have ivronged me. — Rule IX. 



SENTENCES USED AS NOUNS. 35 

(b) Supply an ellipsis and read thus : " Let me see the ensign of 
the Kepublic bearing for its motto no such miserable interrogatory 
as, What is all this worth [would be a miserable interrogatory]. 

What is all this worth is a clause used as a noun, etc., 
and nom. to tvould be understood. — Rule VIII. 



Section 2. 

A sentence used as a noun may be the predicate nominative 
of a proposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. My desire is that you may succeed (a). 

2. Our hope is that such results will follow. 

3. The almost universal feeling appears to be that in- 
dustry can effect nothing, and that every man must re- 
main exactly what he may happen to be. — Ware. 

4. It is not that my lot is low, 

That (6) bids the silent tear to flow.— H. K. White. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) The clause that you may succeed is equivalent to a 
noun, etc., and nom. after is. — Rule X. 

(b) That is a pron., rel., neut., 3d, sing., agreeing with its ante- 
cedent it — Eule VI; and subj. of bids. — Rule VIII. 



Section 3. 

A sentence used as a noun may be the object of a transitive 
verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. All men know that honesty is the best policy (a). 
2. I know not who it was. 3. "It must be so, my 
child," said the poor widow. 4. "I'll bury my talons 



36 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

in his brain," said the eagle. 5. "I'll tear his eyes 
out," screamed the hawk. 6. "I'll whip him to death 
with my tail," barked the fox. 7. "I'll sting him 
home," hissed the rattlesnake. 

8. Whether youth can be imputed to a man as a 
crime, I shall not assume the province of determining 
(b). — Pitt. 9. That greatness confers no exemption from 
the cares and sorrows of life, the monarch of Israel ex- 
perienced. — Blair. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) That honesty is the foest policy is a clause used as 
a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by know. — Rule III. 

(b) Whether youth can foe imputed to a man as a 

crime is a clause used as a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by de- 
termining. — Rule III. 



Section 4. 

A combination of sentences, and even an entire discourse, 
has sometimes the construction of a noun in the objective case, 
governed by a transitive verb or participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. "How happy," exclaimed this child of air, 
"Are the holy spirits who wander there, 

'Mid flowers that never shall fade or fall ! 
Though mine are the gardens of earth and sea, 
And the stars themselves have flowers for me, 

One blossom of heaven outblooms them all. 
Though bright are the Avaters of Singsuhay, 
And the golden floods that thitherward stray, 
Yet, oh, 'tis only the blest can say, 

How the waters of heaven outshine them all. 



SENTENCES USED AS NOUNS. 37 

Go, wing thy flight from star to star, 
From world to luminous world, as far 

As the universe spreads its flaming wall ; 
Take all the pleasures of all the spheres, 
And multiply each through endless years — 

One minute of heaven is Avorth them all." (a). — 
Moore. 

2. And when there was made a great silence, he spake 
unto them in the Hebrew tongue, saying, " Men, breth- 
ren, and fathers, hear ye my defense which I make now 
unto you : I am verily a man which am a Jew," etc. (6). 
— Acts xxii. 

MODELS FOK PARSING. 

(a) The whole quotation commencing with " How happy are the 
holy spirits who wander there/' and ending, " One minute of heaven 
is worth them all," is the object of exclaimed, and is therefore equiv- 
alent to a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by exclaimed. — Kule III. 

(6) The whole of Paul's speech, in the twenty-second chapter of 
Acts, lias the construction of a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by the 
participle saying, which is the last word of the twenty-first chapter. 



Section 5. 

A sentence used as a noun may be the object of a preposi- 
tion. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. That depends upon who can run the fastest (a). 
2. Before the mountains were brought forth, even from 
everlasting to everlasting, thou art God. 3. Since the 
world began w r as it not heard that any man opened the 
eyes of one that was born blind. 4. The farmer locked 
the door after the horse had been stolen. 5. He assured 
us [(6)] that we w r ere mistaken. 6. I grieved [(c)] that 
my work was done. 



38 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

7. I was not aware [(d)] that he had been a soldier. 

8. He was conscious [(e)] that he had done wrong. 

9. I am glad [(/)] that you have come. 10. I am 
sorry [(/)] that you have not been successful. 11. I 
am afraid [(</)] that he will hurt himself. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Who can run the Fastest is a sentence used as a noun, 
etc. ; obj.j and governed by the preposition upon. — Rule IV. 

(6) Read thus : " He assured us [of this thing, namely] that we 
were mistaken;" and parse that we ivere mistaken as a noun, etc.; 
obj., and in apposition with thing understood. — Rule I. 

(c) Read thus : " I grieved [on this account, namely] that my 
work was done;" and parse that my work was done as a noun, etc.; 
obj., and in apposition with account understood. — Rule I. 

(d) Supply [of the fact], and parse that he had been a soldier as a 
noun in apposition with the objective fact understood. — Rule I. 

(e) Supply [of this thing, namely]. 
(/) Supply [on this account, namely]. 

(g) Supply [in regard to this thing, namely]. 

Remark. — Whenever a clause introduced by the conjunction that 
completes the meaning of a preceding verb or adjective, as in the 
foregoing examples, it has the construction of a noun in the objec- 
tive case, and is in apposition with a foregoing noun, sometimes 
expressed, but more frequently understood, denoting end, purpose, 
design, cause, etc., and governed by a preposition. 

ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES. 

1. He studies [(«)] that he may learn. 2. I am 
pleased [(&)] that the pupils have acquitted themselves 
so well. 3. I am surprised [(6)] that you should be so 
careless. 4. I wonder [(6)] that he should act so fool- 
ishly. 

(a) Read [to the end]. 

(h) Supply [at this thing, namely]. 



PROPER AND COMMON NOUNS. 39 



ARTICLE VII. 



PBOPEK AND COMMON NOUNS DISTIN- 
GUISHED. 

Section 1. 

Alternate sentences in which the same object is first desig- 
nated by a common noun, and then by a proper noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The emperor rode on horseback. Alexander re- 
viewed the troops. 

2. The queen rode a white palfrey. Victoria visited 
Scotland. 

3. The prince traveled in foreign countries. Albert 
visited America. 

4. The president visited Fortress Monroe in March. 
Lincoln was assassinated in April. 

5. The steamer was bound for New Orleans. The 
Ben Sherrod was burned on the Mississippi. 

Section 2. 

A proper noun as the subject, and a common noun as the 
predicate nominative, both denoting the same object. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Washington was the father of his country. 2. 
Cicero w r as a celebrated Roman orator. 3. Hannibal 
was a famous Carthagenian general. 4. Moses was the 
Jewish lawgiver. 5. Saul was the first Israelitish king. 



40 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

6. Morse was the inventor of the telegraph. 7. Newton 
was the prince of philosophers. 8. Columbus was the 
discoverer of America. 9. Stephen was the first Chris- 
tian martyr. 

Section 3, 

A common noun in apposition with a proper noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I left the parcel with Johnson, the merchant. 2. I 
sold my horse to Henderson, the coachmaker. 3. I 
bought this watch of Smith, the jeweler. 4. Paul, the 
apostle of the Gentiles, wrote a letter to the Hebrews. 

5. I bought this rosebush of Grovett, the nurseryman. 

6. I get my flour of Doty, the miller. 

Section 4. 
A proper noun in apposition with a common noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Prince Albert was the husband of Queen Victoria. 
2. Lady Jane Grey was beheaded with her husband, 
Lord Guilford. 3. I have employed Lawyer White to 
manage my case. 4. The case was tried by Justice 
Shane. 5. This poem was written by Mrs. Hemans. 
6. Lord Chesterfield was noted for his politeness. 

Section 5. 

Alternate sentences in which the same word is used first as 
a proper noun, and then as a common noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The sun is the great dispenser of light and heat. 
Every fixed star is a sun. 



COMPOUND NOUNS. 41 

2. The moon rules the night. The earth has one 
moon, and Saturn has eight. 

3. The earth is one of the planets. Earth, air, fire, 
and water are the four elements of the old philosophers. 

4. Christmas is celebrated in commemoration of the 
birth of our Savior. I spent last Christmas at the 
house of a friend. 

5. Soft is the strain when Zephyr gently blows. — Pope. 
A zephyr is a gentle w 7 est wind. 



ARTICLE VIII. 



COMPOUND NOUNS. 
Section 1. 

Compound proper nouns. 
(a) Proper names composed of hvo proper nouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. George Washington was appointed commander-in- 
chief (a). 2. Andrew Jackson was elected president. 
3. John Quincy Adams (b) succeeded James Monroe 
as president. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) George Washington is a compound proper noun, hav- 
ing the noun George as its basis, which is limited by Washington, a 
proper noun in apposition with George. It is masc., 3d, sing., nom., 
and is the subj. of ivas appointed. — Rule VIII. 
P. M.— 4. 



42 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 



OTHERWISE. 



C*e©Fge Washington is a compound proper noun, having 
Washington as its basis, which is limited by George, a proper noun 
used as an adjective. It is masc, etc.; nom., and subj. of the verb 
ivas appointed. — Kule VIII. 

OTHERWISE. 

George Washington is a proper noun; masc, 3d, sing., 
nom., and subj. of the verb ivas appointed. — Rule VIII. 

Remark. — Compound names are commonly parsed according to 
the last of the foregoing methods, which is to be preferred on ac- 
count of its simplicity. 

(6) John Quincy Adams is a compound proper noun, hav- 
ing the proper noun Adams as its basis, which is limited by the 
compound proper noun John Quincy, used as an adjective. John 
Quincy Adams is masc, 3d, sing., nom., and is the subj. of the verb 
succeeded. — Rule VIII. 

OTHERWISE. 

John Quincy Adams is a noun, prop., masc, 3d, sing., 
nom., and subj. of the verb succeeded. — Rule VIII. 

Remarks. — 1. About the time that surnames first began to be 
used, one of the numerous Johns then living, who was a smith by 
trade, was called by his neighbors John the Smith, or John Smith, to 
distinguish him from the other Johns. The surname Smith must, 
therefore, have been originally a noun in apposition with John. 
But this John Smith had a family of sons, who were all Smiths by 
virtue of their descent. To distinguish these young Smiths from 
each other, one was called George, another Charles, and a third 
Joseph. The names George, Charles, and Joseph, thus used for the 
purpose of distinguishing one Smith from another, are obviously 
used as adjectives. 

2. Suppose that a teacher has in his school but one boy named 
John. That boy will answer whenever the teacher calls the name 
John. But suppose that there are in the school two boys named 
John, the one having the surname Smith, and the other the surname 
Brown. Then the teacher, in calling the one or the other of these 
boys, must add the name Smith or Brown, for the purpose of identi- 
fying the boy meant. Smith or Brown would, in this case, evidently 
be a noun in apposition with John. 



COMPOUND NOUNS. 43 

3. Suppose that a teacher has in his school but one boy named 
Smith. This boy will respond to the call, " Smith !" But if there 
are two Smiths in the school, the teacher must indicate which boy 
he means by"prefixing to the name Smith the distinctive appella- 
tion George or Charles. The name George or Charles, thus used, 
would be an adjective limiting the noun Smith. 

4. It may be stated as a rule, that when one noun is added to 
another, by way of explanation, the added noun is in apposition 
with the first; and that when one noun is prefixed to another, for 
the purpose of distinguishing one person or tiling from another, the 
noun prefixed is used as an adjective. 

5. If in calling the name John Smith, I emphasize Smith, I make 
it a noun in apposition with the noun John; but if I emphasize 
John, I make it an adjective limiting the noun Smith. 

(b) Proper names composed of a proper noun and an 
adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. New Siberia is an island lying north of Asia (a). 

2. Great Britain is a large island lying west of Europe. 

3. Little Bokhara is a country of Asia. 

MODELS FOR PARSING- 

(a) New Siberia is a compound proper noun, consisting of the 
proper noun Siberia, which is the basis, and of the adjective New, 
which qualifies Siberia. It is neut., 3d, sing., nom., and subj. of 
is.— Rule VIII. 

OTHERWISE. 

New Siberia is a noun, prop., etc. 

(c) A compound proper noun may consist of a common 
noun and an adjective. 



EXAMPLES. 

1. The Pacific Ocean is not subject to violent storms 
(a). 2. The Rocky Mountains extend north and south 



44 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

through the western part of the United States. 3. The 
Mediterranean Sea lies north of Africa. 4. The Arctic 
Ocean lies north of Europe, Asia, and America. 5. The 
Great Bear is a northern constellation. 6. The Red 
River is a tributary of the Mississippi. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Pacific Ocean is a'comp. prop, noun, consisting of the 
common noun ocean, which is its basis, and of the adj. Pacific, which 
modifies ocean. Pacific Ocean is neut., etc., and is the subj. of is. — 
Eule VIII. 

(d) A compound proper noun may be composed of a 
common noun used as the basis, and of a proper noun 
used as an adjective to qualify the common noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The Niagara Falls present a sublime spectacle (a). 
2. Richmond is situated on the James River. 3. I re- 
side in Washington City. 4. Cincinnati is in Hamilton 
County. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Niagara Falls is a compound proper noun, consisting of 
the common noun falls, which is the basis, and of the proper noun 
Niagara, used as an adj. to modify falls. It is neut., 3d, plu., nom., 
and subj. of present. — Rule VIII. 

(e) A compound proper noun may be composed of two 
common nouns, the latter being the basis, and the former 
being used as an adjective to qualify the latter. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Pilot Knob is a mountain in Missouri (a). 2. Coun- 
cil Bluffs are on the Missouri River. 3. Independence 
Hall is the name of the building in which the Declaration 
of Independence was signed. 



COMPOUND NOUNS. 45 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Pilot I&nob is a compound proper noun, consisting of the 
common noun knob, which is the basis, and of the common noun 
pilot, used as an adj. to qualify knob. It is neut., 3d, sing., nom., 
and subj. of is. — Kule VIII. 

(f) A compound proper noun may be composed of a 
common noun used as^the basis, and of a proper noun in 
apposition with the common noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Cleveland is situated on the southern shore of Lake 
Erie (a). 2. Mount Vernon was the residence of Wash- 
ington. 3. Cape May is at the entrance of Delaware 
Bay. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) ILalie Erie is a compound proper noun, consisting of the 
common noun lake, which is the basis, and of the proper noun 
Erie, which is in apposition with lake. It is neut., 3d, sing., obj v 
and governed by of. — Rule IV. 

(g) A compound proper noun may be composed of a com- 
mon noun used as the basis, and of a proper noun in the 
possessive governed by the common noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Pike's Peak is in the central part of Colorado (a). 

2. Behring's Strait separates North America from Asia. 

3. Baffin's Bay separates North America from Green- 
land. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Pike's Peak: is a compound proper noun, consisting of the 
common noun peak, which is the basis, and of the proper noun 
Pike's, which it governs in the possessive case. It is neut., etc., 
nom., and subj. of the verb is. — Rule VITT. 



46 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

(h) A compound proper noun may consist of a common 
noun, and of a noun either proper or common connected with 
it by the preposition of. 



EXAMPLES. 

1. The Bay of Fundy is between Nova Scotia and 
New Brunswick (a). 2. The Gulf of St. Lawrence is 
east of Canada. 3. The Straits of Belle Isle are between 
Newfoundland and Labrador. 



MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) The Hay of Funcly is a compound proper noun, con- 
sisting of the common noun bay modified by the, and of the proper 
noun Fundy connected with bay by the preposition of. It is in the 
nom, case, and is the subj. of is*. — Rule VIII. 



Section 2„ 

Compound common nouns. 

(a) Nouns composed of a noun and an adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A black-bird. 2. A humming-bird. 3. A spinning- 
wheel. 4. A smoothing-iron. 5. A frying-pan. 6. A 
dining-room. 7. A scaling-ladder. 8. A printing-press. 
9. A pruning-knife. 10. Yon black bird' is not a black'- 
bird, but a crow. 11. This black ber'ry is not a black'- 
berry, but a currant. 12. All black ber'ries are black, 
but some blackberries are white. 

(b) Nouns composed of two nouns, the first being used as 
an adjective to limit the second. 



COLLECTIVE NOUNS. 47 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A rose-bud. 2. A dew-drop. 3. A sheep-fold. 

4. A rail-road. 5. A steam-boat. 6. A hand-cart. 

7. A tea-spoon. 8. A coffee-pot. 9. A cherry-tree. 

10. A sword-fish. 11. A shot-gun. 12. A horse-whip. 

(c) Nouns composed of a noun and a verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A curry-comb. 2. A w T ash-tub. 3. A draw-well. 
4. A turn-key. 5. A weigh-master. 



ARTICLE IX. 



COLLECTIVE NOUNS.* 

Section 1. 

Collective nouns conveying plurality of idea. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The council were unanimous (a). 

2. The jury w T ere unable to agree. 

3. The committee are in consultation. 

4. The committee disagreed among themselves (&). 

5. The fair sex, whose task is not to mingle in the 
labors of public life, have their part assigned them to 
act. 



* Acknowledgment. — The author is indebted chiefly to Goold 
Brown for the quotations exemplifying the use of Collective 
Nouns. 



48 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

6. A law is only the expression of the desire of a 
multitude who have power to punish. 

7. The flock are widely scattered. 

8. The council were divided in their sentiments. 

9. The Christian world are beginning to wake out of 
their slumber. 

10. To this one pathway gently winding leads, 
Where march a train with baskets on their heads. — 

Pope. 

11. Liberty should reach every individual of a people, 
as they all share a common nature. 

12. I mean that part of mankind known by the name 
of women's men, or beaux. — Spectator. 

13. It is vain for a people to expect to be free, unless 
they are first willing to be virtuous. 

14. This enemy had now enlarged their confederacy, 
and made themselves more formidable than before. 

15. The jury will be confined till they agree on a 
verdict. 

16. Mankind directed their first cares to the needful. 

17. It is difficult to deceive a free people respecting 
their true interest. 

18. All flesh had corrupted their way upon the earth. 

19. There happened to the army a very strange acci- 
dent, which put them in great consternation. 

20. He hath not beheld iniquity in Jacob, neither hath 
he seen perverseness in Israel : the Lord his God is with 
him, and the shout of a king is among them. 

21. The army, whom their chief had abandoned, pur- 
sued meanwhile their miserable march. 

22. The gentry are punctilious in their etiquette. 



COLLECTIVE NOUNS. 49 

23. In France the peasantry go barefoot, and the mid- 
dle sort make use of wooden shoes. 

24. The people rejoice in that which should give them 
sorrow. 

25. No company like to confess that they are ignorant. 

26. Far the greater part of their captives were an- 
ciently sacrificed. 

27. A great majority of our authors are defective in 
their manner. 

28. The greater part of these new-coined words have 
been rejected. 

29. While still the busy world are treading o'er 
The paths they trod five thousand years before. 

30. Then came a bold and hardy few, 

They breasted the unknown wave ; 
I saw from far the wandering crew, 

And I knew they were high and brave. 
And now that bold and hardy few 

Are a nation w T ide and strong, 
And danger and doubt I 've led them through, 

And they worship me in song. 

31. How T venerable were that patriotic company] how 
sublime [was] their gathering through the land ! 

32. The generality of his hearers were favorable to his 
doctrine. — Allen. 

33. The public are often deceived by false appearances 
and extravagant pretensions. 

34. A considerable number of the confederates were 
induced to abandon the counsels of the nuncio. — History 
of Ireland. 

35. In youth, the multitude eagerly pursue pleasure, 
as if it were their chief good. 

P. M.— 5. 



50 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

36. The enemy were not able to support the charge, 
and they dispersed and fled. 

37. The defendant's counsel had a difficult task imposed 
upon them. 

38. The board of health publish their proceedings. 

39. I saw all the species thus delivered from their 
sorrows. — Johnson. 

40. The depths his bounty share, 
Where sport the scaly swarm. 

41. Whatever Adam's posterity lost through him, that, 
and more, they gain in Christ. 

42. There was a sound of revelry by night, 

And Belgium's capital had gathered then 
Her beauty and her chivalry, and bright 

The lamps shone o'er fair women and brave 
men. — Byron. 

43. All the assembly were filled with distress, and 
melted into tears. — Blair. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Coiiiacll is a collective noun conveying plurality of idea, 
and is the subj. of the verb were. — Rule VIII. 

Were is a verb, irreg., intrans., indie, 1st, past, 3d, plu., and 
agrees with its subj. council. — Rule IX, Note 7. 

(b) Themselves is a compound personal pronoun, 3d, plu., 
masc, agreeing with its antecedent committee. — Rule VI, Note 6. 

Section 2. 

Collective nouns conveying the idea of unity. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The meeting (a) went on with its business as a 
united body. 



COLLECTIVE NOUNS. 51 

2. Every religious association has an undoubted right 
to adopt a code for itself. 

3. Hath a nation changed its gods, which are yet no 
gods ? 

4. The number of school districts has increased since 
last year. 

5. That court is famous for the justice of its decis- 
ions. 

6. The convention then resolved itself into a commit- 
tee of the whole. 

7. The crowd was so great that he with difficulty made 
his way through it (b). 

8. I saw the whole species thus delivered of its sor- 
rows. 

9. One morning, before the family was stirring, the 
clock suddenly stopped. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Meeting is a collective noun conveying the idea of unity, 
and is the subj. of the verb went on. — Rule VIII. 

Went on is a verb, irreg., comp., intrans., indie, 1st, past, 3d, 
sing., agreeing with its subj. meeting. — Rule IX, Note 8. 

(b) It is a pronoun, neut., 3d, sing., agreeing with its antecedent 
crowd. — Rule VI. It is in the obj. case, and governed by through. — 
Rule IV. 



52 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 



ARTICLE X. 



PERSONIFICATION. 

Common nouns of the neuter gender rendered proper, and 
also masculine or feminine, by personification. 



EXAMPLES. 

1. Necessity (a) is the mother of Invention (6). 

2. Idleness (c) and Ignorance (d) are the parents of 
Vice and Misery (e). 

3. O Death! (/) where is thy sting? O Grave! (/) 
where is thy victory? 

4. Restless mortals toil for nought, 

Bliss (g) in vain from earth is sought ; 
Bliss, a native of the sky, 
Never wanders, mortals try; 
There you can not seek in vain, 
For to seek her is to gain. 

5. O Luxury ! (h) 
Bane of elated life, of affluent states ! 
What dreary change, what ruin is not thine! 
How doth thy bowl intoxicate the mind ! 

To the soft entrance of thy rosy cave, 

How dost thou lure the fortunate and great ! 

Dreadful attraction ! 

6. O sacred Solitude ! '(%) divine retreat ! 
Choice of the prudent, envy of the great! 

By thy pure stream, and in thy waving shade, 
We court fair Wisdom (&), that celestial maid: 



PERSOXIFICA TION. 53 

The genuine offspring of her loved embrace, 
Strangers on earth, are Innocence and Peace (7) : 
There, blessed with health, with business un per- 
plexed, 
This life we relish, and secure the next. 

7. Let coward Guilt (m), with pallid Fear (n), 

To sheltering caverns fly, 
And justly dread the vengeful fate 

That thunders through the sky. 
Protected by that hand whose law 

The threatening storms obey, 
Intrepid Virtue (o) smiles secure 

As in the blaze of day. 

8. In these deep solitudes and awful cells, 

Where heavenly, pensive Contemplation (p) dwells, 
And ever-musing Melancholy reigns, 
What mean these tumults in a vestal's veins? — 
Pope. 

9. As yet 't is midnight deep ; the weary clouds, 
Slow meeting, mingle into solid gloom. 
Now, while the drowsy world is lost in sleep, 
Let me associate w r ith the serious Night (q), 
And Contemplation, her sedate compeer. 

10. Now came still Evening on, and Twilight gray 
Had in her sober livery all things clad. — Milton. 

11. Lo, a form divinely bright 
Descends and bursts upon my sight ! 
A seraph of celestial birth, 
Religion was her name on earth : 
Supremely sweet her radiant face, 
And blooming with celestial grace; 
Three shining cherubs formed her train, 
Waved their light wings and reached the plain; 



54 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Faith, with sublime and piercing eye, 
And pinions fluttering for the sky ; 
Here Hope, that smiling angel, stands, 
And golden anchors grace her hands ; 
There Charity, in robes of white, 
Fairest and favorite maid of light. — Cotton. 

12. No more, thus brooding o'er yon heap, 
With Avarice painful vigils keep : 

In life can love be bought with gold ? 

Are friendship's pleasures to be sold? 

No! all that's worth a wish, a thought, 

Fair Virtue gives unbribed, unbought : 

Cease, then, on trash thy hopes to bind, 

Let nobler views engage thy mind. — Dr. Johnson. 

13. 'Tis done! dread Winter spreads his latest gloom, 
And reigns tremendous o'er the conquered year. — 

Thomson. 

14. Here rests his head upon the lap of Earth, 

A youth to Fortune and to Fame unknown ; 
Fair Science frowned not on his humble birth, 

And Melancholy marked him for her own. 
Large was his bounty, and his soul sincere ; 

Heaven did a recompense as largely send : 
He gave to Misery all he had — a tear ; 

He gained from Heaven — 'twas all he wished — 
a friend. — Gray. 

15. O Solitude! romantic maid! 
Whether by nodding towers you tread, 
Or haunt the desert's trackless gloom, 
Or hover o'er the yawning tomb, 

Or climb the Andes' clifted side, 
Or by the Nile's coy course abide; 



PERSOXIFICA TIOK 55 

Or, starting from your half-year's sleep, 
From Hecla view the thawing deep : 
Or, at the purple dawn of day, 
Tadmor's marble waste survey, 
You, recluse, again I woo, 
And again your steps pursue. 

Plumed Conceit, himself surveying; 
Folly, with her shadow playing; 
Purse-proud, elbowing Insolence ; 
Bloated empiric, puffed Pretense : 
Noise, that through a trumpet speaks ; 
Laughter, in loud peals that breaks ; 
Intrusion, with a fopling's face, 
Ignorant of time and place ; 
Sparks of fire Dissension blowing; 
Ductile, court-bred Flattery bowing; 
Restraint's stiff neck, Grimace's leer; 
Squint-eyed Censure's artful sneer ; 
Ambition's buskins steeped in blood, 
Fly thy presence, Solitude. 

Sage Reflection, bent with years ; 
Conscious Virtue, void of fears; 
Muffled Silence, wood-nymph shy; 
Meditation's piercing eye ; 
Halcyon Peace, on moss reclined ; 
Retrospect, that scans the mind; 
Rapt, earth-gazing Revery ; 
Blushing, artless Modesty ; 
Health, that snuffs the morning air ; 
Full-eyed Truth, with bosom bare ; 
Inspiration, Nature's child, 
Seek the solitary wild. 

When all Nature's hushed asleep, 
Nor Love nor Guilt their vigils keep, 



56 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Soft you leave your caverned den, 
And wander o'er the works of men. 
But when Phosphor brings the dawn, 
By his dappled coursers drawn, 
Again you to the wild retreat, 
And the early huntsman meet, 
Where, as you pensive pass along, 
You catch the distant shepherd's song, 
Or brush from herbs the pearly dew, 
Or the rising primrose view : 
Devotion lends her heaven-plumed wings, 
You mount, and Nature with you sings. 

Since in each scheme of life I've failed, 
And disappointment seems entailed ; 
Since all on earth I valued most, 
My guide, my stay, my friend is lost, 
You, only you, can make me blessed, 
And hush the tempest in my breast; 
Then gently deign to guide my feet 
To your hermit-trodden seat, 
Where I may live at last my own, 
Where I at last may die unknown. 

I spoke : she turned her magic ray, 
And thus she said, or seemed to say: 
" Youth, you're mistaken if you think to find 
In shades a medicine for a troubled mind ; 
Wan Grief will haunt you wheresoe'er you go, 
Sigh in the breeze, and with streamlet flow : 
There pale Inaction pines his life away, 
And satiate mourns the quick return of day ; 
There naked Frenzy, laughing wild with pain, 
Or bares the blade, or plunges in the main ; 
There Superstition broods o'er all her fears, 
And yells of demons in the Zephyr hears." — 
Grainger. 



PERSONIFICATION. 57 

RULES FOR THE GENDER OF PERSONIFIED NOUNS. 

Rule 1. — Natural objects possessing the feminine attributes of 
beauty, gentleness, loveliness, and the like, are represented as fe- 
males when personified ; as Virtue, Faith, Hope, Charity, Modesty, 
the Spring, the Moon. 

Rule 2. — Natural objects possessing the masculine attributes of 
sternness, power, majesty, and the like, are represented as males 
when personified; as Time, Death, Ambition, War, Winter, the 
Sun, the Ocean. 

Suggestion. — Let the pupil be required to point out the nouns 
that are personified in the foregoing extracts ; also let him indicate 
the gender, and assign the reason for ascribing to a personified noun 
the masculine rather than the feminine, or the feminine rather than 
the masculine gender. 

MODELS FOR THE PARSING OF PERSONIFIED NOUNS. 

(a) Necessity is a common noun rendered proper by personifi- 
cation. Necessity is naturally of the neuter gender, but is here rep- 
resented as being the name of a female, and is therefore to be parsed 
as being feminine by personification. 

(6) Invention is a common noun rendered proper by personi- 
fication. If we regard inventiveness as being a characteristic of the 
male rather than of the female intellect, then Invention, the child of 
Necessity is a young man, and the noun Invention should be parsed 
as being masculine by personification. 

(c) Idleness is proper by personification. We may regard it 
as masculine, because idleness is more commonly spoken of as the 
reproach of males than of females. 

(d) Ignorance is necessarily feminine, since we have made 
Idleness masculine, and since the two together are the parents of a 
family of children. 

(e) Of the two children of Idleness and Ignorance, Vice is a rakish 
and dissolute young man, and Misery is an idle, slatternly young 
woman, who has not intelligence and energy enough to hem a hand- 
kerchief or to comb her own hair. 

(/) Death and the Grave are horrid objects, and therefore, 
when personified, are appropriately made masculine. 



58 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

(g) Bliss is a state of feeling in the highest degree pleasurable. 
The word, therefore, properly becomes feminine by personification. 

(h) liiixury is represented as practicing the seductive arts of a 
licentious woman. The noun should therefore be parsed as feminine 
by personification. 

(i) Solitude is the name of a retired and quiet situation con- 
genial to female tastes and habits. The poets, therefore, make the 
noun feminine by personification. 

(k) Wisdom, on account of its excellence, is made feminine by 
personification. 

(I) Innocence and Peace, on account of their loveliness and 
desirableness, are appropriately rendered feminine by personifica- 
tion. 

(m) Guilt, in the personified use of the word, is the name of an 
individual who has committed murder or some other crime ; and as 
crimes are more frequently perpetrated by males than by females, 
we may regard the name as masculine. 

(n) Fear also represents a person who has committed a crime, 
and is endeavoring to escape the pursuit of Justice, and is therefore 
masculine, for the reason given in the last example. 

(o) Virtue, from its possessing every lovely attribute, is fem- 
inine. 

(p) Contemplation, on account of the calmness and compo- 
sure by which it is accompanied, is feminine. 

(q) Night, from the agreeable stillness by which it is accompa- 
nied, is made feminine in poetry. The same may be said of the 
nouns Evening and Twilight. 



THE PRONOUNS. 59 



ARTICLE XI. 



THE PRONOUNS. 
Section 1. 

TIw personal pronouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I, Alexander, am emperor of Russia. My pos- 
sessions lie in the north of Europe and Asia, and sixty 
millions of people are subject to me (a). 

(a) I is a personal pronoun ; 1st, sing., masc, to agree with its 
antecedent Alexander. — Rule VI. I is in the norn. case, and is the 
subj. of the verb am. — Rule VIII. 

Alexander is a noun ; prop., 1st, sing., masc, nom., and in 
apposition with /. — Eule I. 

Jly is a pronoun ; 1st, sing., masc, to agree with its antecedent 
Alexander. — Rule VI. My is in the poss, case, and governed by 
possessions. — Rule II. 

Me is a personal pronoun ; 1st, sing., masc, to agree with its an- 
tecedent Alexander — Rule VI; and is in the objective case, and 
governed by the prep. to. — Rule IV. 

2. I, Victoria, am queen of England. The sun never 
sets on my dominions, and one hundred and fifty millions 
of people own me as their sovereign (a). 

(a) I is a personal pronoun ; 1st, sing., fern., and agrees with its 
antecedent Victoria. — Rule VI. i" is in the nom. case, and is the 
subj. of am. — Rule VIII. 

3. We, the young men of this academy, would respect- 
fully ask our teacher, Mr. A., to grant us a holiday on 

to-morrow. 



60 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

4. We, the young ladies of Oakland Seminary, beg of 
our beloved preceptress, Miss B., to favor us with the 
acceptance of the accompanying present. 

5. We, the pupils of Mr. C.'s school, would express 
our gratitude for his kindness to us. 

Remark. — If the pupils are all males, the pronouns we, our, and 
us are masculine ; if the pupils are all females, the pronouns are 
feminine; and if the pupils are partly males and partly females, 
the pronouns are of the common gender. By a noun of the common 
gender is meant a noun that is sometimes masculine and sometimes 
feminine, as parent, child, bird. In any particular instance, if the 
gender of a singular noun denoting a particular person or animal 
is known, the noun should be parsed either as masculine or fem- 
inine, according to the fact. If the gender of a singular noun de- 
noting a person is not determined either by its form or by the con- 
text, then, according to the usage of all languages, such singular 
noun is represented by a masculine pronoun ; as, " a parent should 
supply the wants of his children." 

If a noun denoting persons is of the plural number, and includes 
individuals of both sexes, such a noun, in any language in which 
adjectives agree with their substantives in gender, must be qualified 
by masculine adjectives ; and therefore the noun, although it in- 
cludes individuals of both sexes, is of the masculine gender. In 
Latin, for instance, we may say, "Est bonorum parentum liberis 
consulere " (It is the part of good parents to provide for their chil- 
dren). Here parentum, signifying parents, is qualified by the mas- 
culine adjective bonorum, signifying good. The Latin noun parentum 
is therefore of the masculine gender ; and hence we may conclude 
that the English noun parents, including both fathers and mothers, 
should always be regarded as being masculine, and that the expres- 
sion common gender should not be used in parsing. 

6. Thou, Lord, in the beginning hast laid the founda- 
tion of the earth, and the heavens are the w T orks of thine 
hands. 

7. I will sing of mercy and judgment : unto thee, O 
Lord, will I sing. 

8. Martha, thou art careful and troubled about many 
things. 



THE PRONOUNS. 61 

9. Woman, behold thy son. 

10. Mary, the master is come, and calleth for thee. 

11. Boys, as soon as you have prepared your lessons 
I will hear you recite. 

12. Girls, have you received the presents that your 
friends sent to you ? 

13. Children, you should do every thing that your 
parents command you to do. 

14. James found his cousin, and he brought him to 
his own home. 

15. The mother reproved her daughter, and told her 
that she had acted very naughtily. 

16. The oak in autumn sheds its foliage, but in spring- 
it renews it again. 

17. The boys said that they had spent the money which 
their parents gave them. 

18. The girls say that they have learned all the lessons 
that their teacher has assigned to them. 

19. The children played in the evening till they became 
tired and sleepy, when their parents sent them to bed. 

20. When the leaves have been touched by the au- 
tumnal frosts, they change their color, become loosened 
from the boughs, and the wind scatters them over the 
ground. 



& 



Section 2. 
The absolute possessive pronouns. 



EXAMPLES. 



1. Whose son was praised? Mine (thine, his, hers, 
ours, yours, theirs) was praised (a). 



G2 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

2. Whose son did they praise? They praised mine 
(thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs) (b). 

3. Whose sons were praised? Mine (thine, his, hers, 
ours, yours, theirs) were praised (c). 

4. Whose sons did they praise ? They praised mine 
(thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs). 

5. Whose daughter was commended? Mine (thine, 
his, hers, ours, yours, theirs) was commended. 

6. Whose daughters did they commend? They com- 
mended mine (thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs). 

7. Whose book lies on the table? Mine (thine, his, 
hers, ours, yours, theirs) lies on the table. 

8. Whose book did he lay on the table ? He laid mine 
(thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs) on the table. 

9. Whose books lie on the table ? Mine (thine, his, 
hers, ours, yours, theirs) lie on the table. 

10. Whose books did they lay on the table? They 
laid mine (thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs) on the 
table. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Mine is an absolute possessive pronoun, of the first person 
and singular number. Mine is here a substitute for my son, and is 
therefore equivalent to a noun, com., 3d, sing., masc, nom., and 
subj. of the verb ivas praised. — Eule VIII. 

Thine is an absolute possessive pronoun, of the 2d pers. sing., 
signifying thy son; his. of the 3d, sing., mase., signifying his son; 
hers 9 of the 3d, sing., fern., signifying her son, etc. Therefore, 
each of the words thine, his, etc., is equivalent to a noun, 3d, sing., 
masc, nom., and subj. of the verb was praised. — Rule VIII. 

(b) In the second example, the possessives mine, thine, etc., 

signifying my son, thy son, etc., are equivalent to nouns, 3d, sing., 
masc, obj., and governed by praised. 



THE PROXOUXS. 63 

(c) In the third example, the pronouns mine, thine, etc., sig- 
nifying my sons, thy sons, etc., represent nouns, plu., masc, nom., 
and subj. of were praised. 

Note. — The words my, thy, his, her, our, your, and their are called 
conjunctive possessive pronouns, because they are conjoined to the noun 
denoting the thing possessed ; while the words mine, thine, his, hers, 
ours, yours, and theirs are called absolute possessive pronouns, for the 
reason that they are used independently of the noun denoting the 
thing possessed. 

It is common to parse mine, yours, etc., as being governed by a 
noun understood. Xow, whenever any word is understood, it can 
always be supplied. But if I say " this book is yours," I can not 
supply the noun book after yours, and say " this book is yours book." 
The fact is, that the absolute possessives include in themselves the 
idea of the thing possessed. One of these words should, therefore, 
first be parsed as a pronoun in the possessive case, and of the same 
gender, number, and person as the possessor, and then as a common 
noun, of the third person, and of the same gender and number as 
the name of the thing possessed, and in the nominative or objective 
case, according to its relation to the other words of the sentence. 

The parsing of the absolute possessives as nouns is justified by 
the analogies of other languages. In French, for instance, the 
words corresponding to our absolute possessives assume the gender 
and number of the noun denoting the thing or things possessed, and 
require the definite article to be prefixed. For example, lemien 
(masculine), and la mienne (feminine), signify the thing that be- 
longs to me; and les miens (masc), and les miennes (fern.), signify 
the things that belong to me ; le, la, and les being the French of the, 
and mien, mienne, miens, miennes being the French for mine. 

Section 3. 

The relative pronouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I, who command you, am the general (a). 

2. I, who wear the crown, am the queen. 

3. I, whose name is Frederick William, am emperor 
of Germany. 



64 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

4. I, whose name is Victoria, am queen of England. 

5. I, James, on whom you have conferred so many 
favors, will not be ungrateful. 

6. I, Mary, to whom you have been so kind, will al- 
ways remember you. 

7. We, who know him, can testify to his good char- 
acter. 

8. We, whose names are undersigned, promise to pay. 

9. We, whom you have befriended, will befriend you 
in return. 

1Q. Thou, who art the Author of life, canst also re- 
store it. 

11. Hail, lovely Nymph, whose bosom heaves the sigh, 
When fancy paints the scene of deep distress. — 

Elegy to Pity. 

12. O Thou, whose balance does the mountains weigh, 
Whose will the wild, tumultuous seas obey. 

13. O God, to whom vengeance belongeth, shew thy- 
self. 

14. Hail, ye heroes, heaven-born band, 

Who fought and bled in Freedom's cause ! 

15. Ye Nymphs of Solyma, who dwell on Mount Zion, 
begin the song. 

16. Boys, you whose parents are incurring so much 
expense to provide for you the means of education, 
should improve your time. 

17. Diplomas will be awarded to you, young ladies, 
whose academic course has been completed. 

18. Children, you whose teachers take so much pains 
to instruct you, should endeavor to learn. 



THE PRONOUNS. 65 

19. I will ever be grateful to thee, my friend, to whom 
I am under so many obligations. 

20. Ye, whom the charms of grandeur please, 
Nursed on the downy lap of ease, 

Fall prostrate at his throne. 

21. The boy who is ill-natured and quarrelsome will 
have few friends. 

22. The girl who is kind and obliging will secure the 
good-will of her associates. 

23. He is a man whose lips are free from guile. 

24. She is a woman whose praise is in the mouths of 
all who know her. 

25. He is a fellow whom nobody respects. 

26. She is the lady whom we saw at the fair. 

27. The boys who deport themselves well will be es- 
teemed. 

28. The girls who have been perfect in their recita- 
tions and deportment are dismissed. 

29. Children who do not honor their parents, disobey 
the command of God. 

30. They are men whose word is as good as their 
bond. 

31. Those are the women whose husbands were killed 
in the battle. 

32. They are men on whom we can depend. 

33. Those are the ladies of whom I spoke. 

34. They are persons whom all delight to honor. 

35. This is the cow which gives milk (b). 

36. That is the bull which bellows so loud. 
P. M.— 6. 



66 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

37. This is the cock whose crowing awakes the farmer 
in the morning. 

38. That is the hen whose chickens Avere caught by 
the fox. 

39. That is the ram which I bought of my brother. 

40. That is the ewe which I gave to my sister. 

41. These are the oxen w T hich draw the cart. 

42. These are the cows which were grazing in the 
meadow. 

43. Those are the oxen whose lowing we heard. 

44. Those are the cows whose milk we use. 

45. Those are the oxen which we shall kill for beef. 

46. These are the cows which the farmer fed. 

47. Those are the cattle which are being fattened for 
market. 

48. This is the book which was lying on the table. 

49. That is the book whose leaves are soiled. 

50. This is the book which I borrowed of my friend. 

51. These are the trees which bear good fruit. 

52. Those are the trees whose blossoms were killed by 
the frost. 

53. These are the trees which my father planted. 

54. I that hold the scepter am the king. 

55. I that wear the diadem am the queen. 

56. I that you have injured have been your friend. 

57. We that enjoy the blessings of civil liberty, wish 
that others may enjoy the same blessings. 

58. We that you have assisted will assist you in re- 
turn. 



the proxouxs. 67 

59. Thou that censurest others, art thyself guilty of the 
same faults. 

60. Ye that fear the Lord, depart from evil. 

61. He that acts wisely deserves praise. 

62. He is a man that every one speaks well of. 

63. She is a woman that minds her own business. 

64. She is a woman that every one esteems. 

65. These are the men that volunteered as soldiers. 

66. Those are the gentlemen that we met on the road. 

67. Those are the ladies that were in the coach. 

68. Those are the ladies that we saw in the cars (c). 

69. Those are the children that were playing on the 
green. 

70. Those are the persons that we met this morning. 

71. This is a book that belongs to my brother. 

72. This is a book that my sister owns. 

73. These are houses that were built by my father. 

74. These are houses that my father built. 

75. Whosoever shall smite thee on thy right cheek, 
turn to him the other also (d). 

76. Whosoever shall compel thee to go a mile, go with 
him twain. 

77. Whatsoever thy hand fmdeth to do, do it with thy 
might (e). 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Wlio is a pronoun; rel., 1st, sing., masc, agreeing with its 
antecedent /. — Eule VI. Who is in the nom. case, and is the subj. 
of the verb command. — Eule VIII. 



68 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

(b) Wliicli is a pronoun ; rel., 3d, sing., fern., and agrees with 
its antecedent cow. — Rule VI. Which is in the nom. case, and is 
the subj. of the verb gives. — Rule VIII. 

(c) That is a pronoun ; rel., 3d, sing., fern., and agrees with its 
antecedent ladies. — Rule VI. That is in the obj. case, and governed 
by saiu. — Rule III. 

(d) Wliosoevei* is a pronoun ; rel., 3d, sing., masc, and agrees 
with its antecedent him. — Rule VI. Whosoever is in the nom. case, 
and it the subj. of shall smite. 

(e) Whatsoever is a pronoun; rel., 3d, sing., neut., agreeing 
with its antecedent it. — Rule VI. Whatsoever is in the obj. case, 
and is governed by findeth. — Rule III. 



Section 4. 

Interrogative pronouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Who is that man? 

2. Who is that woman ? 

3. Whose hat is that ? 

4. Whose bonnet is this ? 

5. Whom did the people elect as governor of the 
state ? 

6. Whom did the lady employ as governess of her 
children ? 

7. Who are these men? 

8. Who are these women? 

9. Whose are these hats? 

10. Whose are those bonnets? 

11. Whom did the company choose as officers? 

12. Whom did Thomas and Henry marry? 



THE PRONOUNS. 69 

13. Who lost this knife ? 

14. Whose book is this ? 

15. To whom shall I give this apple? 

16. Who were at the party? 

17. Whose residences are those? 

18. Whom have you invited as guests? 

19. Which is the man of whom you spoke? 

20. Which is the woman that you meant? 

21. Which are the men that you have hired? 

22. Which are the women that came in the cars? 

23. Which is the bird that sings so sweetly? 

24. Which are the birds that built this nest? 

25. Which is the book that you want? 

26. Which are the trees that you planted? 

27. To which of his two sons did the father give the 
farm? 

28. For which of his daughters did the father buy a 
piano ? 

29. Of which of these men may it be said that they 
are honest and upright? 

30. Of which of these women may it be said that they 
are kind and charitable? 

31. Which of these children shall I adopt as my heir? 

32. Which of these children shall I adopt as my heirs? 

33. Which of the children has left home? 

34. Which of the children have left home ? 

35. Which of the books has been lost? 

36. Which of the books have been lost? 



70 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

37. In which of these houses do you reside? 

38. Which of these pines will the carpenters select for 
ship masts? 

39. What is this ? 

40. What have you done? 

41. What means this martial array? 

42. What signifies sadness? 

43. What is your carnival to him? 

44. What must have been her agony? 

45. Whether of them twain did the will of his father? 

Section 5. 

The relatives what, whatever, whatsoever, who- 
ever, WHOSOEVER. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. It is not what it is supposed to be (a). 

2. What can not be cured must be endured. 

3. What is done can not be undone. 

4. I gave him what was necessary. 

5. Tell me what you have done. 

6. I know not what to do. 

7. The dread of censure ought not to prevail over our 
sense of what is proper. 

8. He who buys what he does not need, will often need 
what he can not buy. 

9. What is just is honest; and again, what is honest 
is just. 



THE PRONOUNS. 71 

10. Whatever purifies, fortifies also the heart (6). 

11. Whatsoever he doeth shall prosper. 

12. Whoever said so did not tell the truth (c). 

13. Whosoever will, may come. 

14. Send whomsoever you please [to send]. 

15. You should not desire to say what you know would 
be provoking to others. 

16. Whosoever looks for a friend without imperfec- 
tions, will never find what he seeks. 

17. Whatsoever doth make manifest is light. 

18. The officer is too anxious about the performance 
of what he is especially charged with, to mind what others 
are doing. 

19. I would much rather hear what it is in your power 
to tell me. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) What is a compound relative, including both the antecedent 
and the relative, and is equivalent to the thing which. 

Tiling, the antecedent part of what, is a noun ; com., 3d, sing., 
neut., and nom. after is. — Eule X. 

Which, the relative part of what, is a pronoun ; 3d, sing., neut., 
agreeing with its antecedent thing — Kule VI ; and is in the nom. 
case after is supposed to be. — Rule X. 

OTHERWISE. 

What is a pronoun ; rel., 3d, sing., neut., agreeing with its an- 
tecedent thing understood — Rule VI ; and is in the nom. case after 
is supposed to be. — Rule X. 

(6) Whatever is a compound relative, including both the an- 
tecedent and the relative, and is equivalent to the thing which. 

Thing, the antecedent part of whatever, is a noun, etc., and nom. 
to fortifies. — Rule VIII. 



72 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Which, the relative part of whatever, is a pronoun ; 3d, sing., 
neut., agreeing with its antecedent thing — Rule VI; and is the subj. 
of the verb purifies. — Rule VIII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Whatever is a pronoun ; rel., 3d, sing., neut., agreeing with its 
antecedent thing understood — Rule VI ; and the subj. of the verb 
purifies. — Rule VIII. 

(c) Whoever is a compound relative, including both the ante- 
cedent and the relative, and is equivalent to the person who. 

Person, the antecedent part of whoever, is a noun; 3d, sing., 
masc, nom., and subj. of the verb did tell. — Rule VIII. 

Who, the relative part of whoever, is a pronoun ; 3d, sing., masc, 
agreeing with its antecedent person — Rule VI ; and is the subj. nom. 
of the verb said. — Rule VIII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Whoever is a pronoun ; rel., 3d, sing., masc, agreeing with its 
antecedent person understood — Rule VI ; and is the subj. nom. of 
said— Rule VIII. 



Directions for parsing a sentence containing any one of the 
relatives what, whatever, whatsoever, whoever, 

WHOSOEVER. 

1. Resolve what, whatever, or whatsoever into the thing which. 

2. Resolve ivhoever or whosoever into the person who, the persons 
ivho, he who, or they who. 

3. Resolve whomsoever into the person whom, the persons whom, him 
whom, or them whom. 

4. After resolving the pronoun, arrange the words of the sentence 
in their proper order, and then parse. 

5. Otherwise, instead of resolving the pronoun, parse it as a sim- 
ple relative referring to an antecedent understood. This latter mode 
of parsing is the preferable one. There are really, neither in the 
English nor in any other language, any pronouns that are com- 
pound in the sense of including both the relative and the ante- 
cedent. 



THE PRONOUNS, 73 

THE RELATIVES OF THE FOREGOING EXAMPLES 
RESOLVED. 

1. It is not the thing which it is supposed to be. 

2. The thing which can not be cured must be endured. 

3. The thing which is done can not be undone. 

4. I gave him the things which were necessary. 

5. Tell me the thing which you have done. 

6. I know not the thing which to do. 

7. The dread of censure ought not to prevail over our 
sense of the thing which is proper. 

8. He who buys the things which he does not need 
will often need the things which he can not buy. 

9. The thing which is honest is just ; and again, the 
thing is just which is honest. 

10. The thing which purifies the heart also fortifies it. 

11. The things shall prosper which he doeth. 

12. The person who said so did not tell the truth. 

13. The person may come who will. 

14. Send the person whom you please to send. 

15. You should not desire to say the things which you 
know would be provoking. 

16. The person who looks for a friend without imper- 
fections, will never find the thing which he seeks. 

17. The thing which is light doth make manifest. 

18. The officer is too anxious about the thing with 
which he is especially charged, to mind the things which 
others are doing. 

19. I would rather hear the things which it is in your 
power to tell me. 

P. M.— 7. 



74 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

Section 6* 

Pronouns relating to two or more antecedents taken in 
connection. 

(a) When the antecedents are of the same person. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. John and George, you may recite your lessons (a). 

2. Susan and Mary, you may put away your books. 

3. Thomas and Martha, you may go home (b). 

4. When Peter and Henry are at school, they are 
obedient to their teacher. 

5. When Harriet and Eliza have finished their work, 
their mother will permit them to play. 

6. Arthur and Sarah had some fine books presented 
to them by their father. 

7. Take this cloak and shawl and put them in the 
wardrobe. 

8. Suffer not jealousy and distrust to enter. They will 
destroy, like a canker, every germ of friendship. 

9. Avoid haughtiness of behavior and affectation in 
manners. They imply a want of solid merit. 

10. You, John and George, who have recited your 
lessons, may go home. 

11. You, Harriet and Eliza, who have finished your 
work, may go and play. 

12. You, Arthur and Sarah, who have received the 
new books, must use them carefully. 

13. There are the man and the boy of whom I spoke. 

14. There are the mother and the daughter who live 
in the cottage. 



THE PRONOUNS. 75 

15. There go the lady and the gentleman whom we 
saw in the cars. 

16. I have found the book and the slate which I had 
lost. 

17. He described the persons and the things that he 
saw. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) John and George are nouns ; prop., 2d., sing., masc, and 
in the nom. independent by way of address. — Rule Y, Note 1. 

You is a pronoun ; 2d, masc., to agree in person and gender with 
its antecedents John and George. — Rule VI. You is plural, because 
its antecedents John and George are taken in connection. — Rule VI, 
Note 1. 

(b) You is a pronoun; second person, because its antecedents, 
Thomas and Martha, are of the second person. — Rule VI. You is 
plural, because its antecedents, Thomas and Martha, are taken in 
connection.*— Rule VI, Note 1. You is masculine, because Thomas, 
one of its antecedents, is masculine. — Rule VI, Note 5. 



(b) When the antecedents are of different persons. 

1. One antecedent being of the first person, and the other 
antecedent, or antecedents, being either of the second or third 
person, or both. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Thon [Thomas] and I [John] have finished onr 
work (a). 

2. Yon [boys] and I [David] have, etc. 

3. He and I [Peter] have, etc. 

4. The men and I [Henry] have, etc. 

5. Thou [Thomas] and w r e [boys] have, etc. 

6. You [boys] and v?e [men] have, etc. 



76 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

7. He and we [boys] have, etc. 

8. The men and we [boys] have, etc. 

9. Thou [Mary] and I [Susan] have, etc. 

10. You [girls] and I [Hannah] have, etc. 

11. She and I [Jane] have, etc. 

12. The women and I [Eliza] have, etc. 

13. Thou [Harriet] and we [girls] have, etCo 

14. You [girls] and we [women] have, etc, 

15. She and we [girls] have, etc. 

16. The woman and we [girls] have, etc. 

17. Thou [Thomas] and I [Mary] have, etc. (6). 

18. You [girls] and I [David] have, etc. 

19. He and I [Eliza] have, etc. 

20. She and I [John] have, etc. 

21. The men and I [Julia] have, etc. 

22. The women and I [Thomas] have, etc. 

23. Thou [Henry] and we [girls] have, etc. 

24. You [women] and we [men] have, etc. 

25. He and we [girls] have, etc. 

26. She and we [boys] have, etc. 

27. The men and we [women] have, etc. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Tliou is a pers. pron. ; 2d, sing., masc, agreeing with 
Thomas, the name of the person addressed. — Rule VI. Thou is in 
the nom. case, and is one of the subjects of the verb have finished. — 
Rule VIII. 

I is a pers. pron. ; 1st, sing., masc, agreeing with John, the name 



THE PR 0X0 US S. 77 

of the person speaking. — Rule VI. I is in the nom. case, and is 
one of the subjects of the verb have finished. 

Have finished is a verb; reg., trans., indie, pres., plu., be- 
cause its two subjects, thou and I, are taken in connection — Rule IX, 
Xote 1 ; and it is of the first person, because 7, one of its subjects, 
is of the first person, the other subject, thou, being of the second 
person. — Rule IX, Note 4. 

Our is a pers. pron. of the first person, because I, one of its an- 
tecedents, is of the first person. — Rule VI, Xote 4. Our is of the 
masculine gender, because its antecedents, thou and I, are mascu- 
line. — Rule VI, Xote 5. Our is in the plural number, because its 
singular antecedents, thou and I, are taken in connection. — Rule 
VI, Xote 1. 

(b) Our is a pers. pron. of the first person, because one of its 
antecedents, I, is of the first person. — Rule VI, Xote 4. Our is of 
the plural number, because its singular antecedents, thou and /, are 
taken in connection. — Rule VI, Xote 1. Our is of the masculine 
gender, because thou, one of its antecedents, is masculine. — Rule VI, 
Xote 5. Our is in the possessive case, and is governed by the noun 
work. — Rule II. 

2. One of the antecedents being of the second person, and 
the other of the third. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Thou [John] and Thomas may recite your lessons 
(a). 

2. You [boys] and Henry may, etc. 

3. You [Thomas] and the boys may, etc. 

4. Thou [Mary] and Susan may, etc. 

5. You [girls] and Clara may, etc. 

6. You [Jane] and the girls may, etc. 

7. Thou [Mary] and Thomas may, etc. 

8. You [girls] and Peter may, etc. 

9. You [boys] and Sarah may, etc. 



78 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) May recite is a verb; reg., trans., poten., pres., second 
person, because thou, one of its subjects, is of the second person. — 
Rule IX, Note 4. May recite is of the plural number, because its 
singular subjects, thou and Thomas, are taken in connection. — Rule 
IX^ Note 1. 

IToui 9 is a pers. pron. ; second person, because thou, one of its 

antecedents, is of the second person. — Rule VI, Note 4. Your is of 
the plural number, because its singular antecedents, thou and Thomas, 
are taken in connection. — Rule VI, Note 1. Your is of the mascu- 
line gender, because its antecedents, thou and Thomas, are mascu- 
line. — Rule VI. Your is in the possessive case, and is governed by 
the noun lessons. — Rule II. 

(c) Two antecedents in the singular taken in connection, 
and referring to the same thing. . 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A kind father and husband has left his place 
vacant (a). 

2. That excellent wife and mother will be missed by 
her husband and children. 

3. That noble patriot and philanthropist was honored 
by the erection of a monument to his memory. 

4. That good neighbor and excellent citizen has de- 
parted, and we shall see him no more. 

5. That honest man and sincere Christian is gone, 
and has left us the precious legacy of his example. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Has left is a verb; irreg., trans., indie, 2d past, and third 
person, because its nominatives, father and husband, are of the third 
person. — Rule IX. Has left is of the singular number, because its 
nominatives, father and husband, designate the same person. — Rule 

IX, Note 2. 



THE PRONOUNS. 79 

His is a pronoun of the third person, because its antecedents, 
father and husband, are of the third person. — Kule VI. His is of 
the sing, num., because its singular antecedents, father and husband, 
though taken together, designate the same person. — Rule VI, Note 
2. .His is in the poss. case, and is governed by the noun place. — ■ 
Rule II. 

Section 7. 

Pronouns referring separately to tivo or more antecedents 
in the singular. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Either Mary or Eliza will do the work for her 
mother (a). 

2. Neither James nor Henry likes his book. 

3. The father, and not the son, lost his life (b). 

4. jSo citizen, no ruler, should give his influence to 
such a measure. 

5. Each leaf and each blossom holds the dew in its 
embrace. 

6. The good man, and the sinner, too, shall receive his 
reward (c). 

7. Truth, and truth only, is worth seeking after for its 
own sake. 

8. Any boy or girl that violates a rule of the school, 
will incur the displeasure of his or her teacher. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Her is a pers. pron. ; 3d, sing., fern., agreeing separately 
with its antecedents, Mary and Eliza. — Kule VI, Note 3. Her is 
in the poss. case, and is governed by the noun mother. 

Will do is a verb; irreg., trans., indie, 1st fut., 3d, sing., 
agreeing separately with its subjects, Mary and Eliza. — Kule IX, 
Note 3. 



80 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

(b) His is a pronoun ; 3d, sing., agreeing with its antecedent 
father. — Eule VI. His is in the poss. case, and is governed by the 
noun life. — Eule II. 

Fattier is a noun, etc., and is the subject of the verb lost. — 
Eule VIII. 

Son is a noun, etc., and subject of the verb lost understood. — 
Eule VIII. 

Note. — The ellipsis being supplied, the sentence will read thus : 
" The father [lost his life], and not the son, lost his life." 

(c) His is a pronoun ; pers., 3d, sing., masc, agreeing with its 
antecedent man. — Eule VI. His is in the poss. case, and is gov- 
erned by reward. — Eule II. 



Section 8. 

Miscellaneous exercises in the parsing of the pronouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. They who have nothing to give, can often afford 
relief to others by imparting what they feel. 

2. Our ignorance of what is to come, and of what is 
really good or evil, should correct our anxiety about 
worldly success. 

3. The chief misfortunes Avhich befall us in life can 
be traced to some vices or follies which we have com- 
mitted. 

4. Moral and religious instruction derives its efficacy 
not so much from what men are taught to know, as 
from what they are brought to feel. 

5. Gentleness corrects whatever is offensive in our 
manners. 

6. What avails the show of external liberty to one 
w T ho hath lost the government of himself? 



THE PRONOUNS. 81 

7. On whom does time hang so heavily as on the 
slothful and lazy? To whom are the hours so lingering? 
Who are so often devoured with spleen, and obliged to 
fly to every expedient which can help them to get rid of 
themselves ? 

8. It is not that my lot is low, 

That bids the silent tear to flow. — H. K White. 

9. There are few persons in the country that I do not 
know something of. 

10. Xow tell us what 'twas all about. 

11. But what they killed each other for, 
I could not well make out. 

12. Is he free who must flatter and lie to compass his 
ends ; who must bear with this man's caprice, and that 
man's scorn ; [ ] must profess friendshij) where he hates, 
and respect where he condemns ; who is not at liberty to 
appear in his own colors, nor to speak his own senti- 
ments ; who dares not be honest, lest he should be 
poor? — Blair. 

13. The upright man esteems nothing but what is 
honorable, and abhors whatever is base and unworthy in 
moral conduct. — Blair. 

14. The upright man is indeed what he appears to be ; 
full of truth, candor, and humanity. — Blair. 

15. Whomsoever I shall kiss, that same is he. — Matt. 
xxvi : 48. 

16. Nothing except what flows from the heart, can 
render even external manners truly pleasing. — Blair. 

17. What I forfeit for myself is a trifle. — Goldsmith. 

18. What were then the sentiments, and what was the 
language of this great and good man? — Blair. 



82 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 



ARTICLE XII. 



ADJECTIVES. 

Section 1. 
Classes of adjectives. 
(a) Common adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Now came still evening on, and twilight gray 
Had in her sober livery all things clad (a). — Milton. 

2. The curfew tolls the knell of parting day (b), 

The lowing herd winds slowly o'er the lea, 
The plowman homeward plods his weary way, 
And leaves the world to darkness and to me. 

Now fades the glimmering landscape on the sight, 
And all the air a solemn stillness holds, 

Save wdiere the beetle wheels his droning flight, 
And drowsy tinklings lull the distant folds ; 

Save that, from yonder ivy-mantled tower, 
The moping owl does to the moon complain 

Of such as, wandering near her secret bower, 
Disturb her ancient solitary reign. 

Beneath those rugged elms, that yew-tree's shade, 
Where heaves the turf in many a moldering heap, 

Each in his narrow cell forever laid, 

The rude forefathers of the hamlet sleep. 

The breezy call of incense-breathing morn, 

The swallow twittering from her straw-built shed, 

The cock's shrill clarion, or the echoing horn, 
No more shall rouse them from their lowly 
bed (c). — Gray. 



ADJECTIVES. 83 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Still is an adjective, a word used to qualify or limit the 
meaning of a substantive; descriptive, because it describes the noun 
to which it belongs. It is also a common adjective, because it is an 
ordinary epithet of the language. It is in the positive degree, be- 
cause it expresses the quality without increase or diminution, and 
qualifies the noun evening. — Rule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Still is a descriptive or common adjective in the positive degree, 
and qualifies the noun evening. — Rule VII. 

(b) Parting is the pres. part, of the reg. intrans. verb to part. 
It is used here as a descriptive adjective, and qualifies the noun 
day. — Rule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Parting is a participial adjective, qualifying the noun dag. — 
Rule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Parting is a descriptive adjective. It can not with propriety 
be compared, and belongs to the noun day. — Rule VII. 

(c) Straw-built is a compound descriptive adjective. It can 
not with propriety be compared, and belongs to the noun shed. — 
Rule VII. 

(b) Definitive adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1st. Demonstratives: as, this man (a), these men (b) ; 
that boy, those boys ; the same girl ; yon or yonder 
house ; both kings. 

2d. Distributives : as, each hour (c) ; every day ; 
either book ; neither pen. 

3d. Indefinites : as, all things ; any person (d) ; cer- 
tain men ; few books ; many dogs ; much water ; one 
lion ; other people ; another Lime ; some cow t s ; what 
news ; which child ; sundry articles ; several items. 



84 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

4th. Numerals : A. Cardinals ; as, one man (e) ; two 
women ; three boys ; four girls, etc. B. Ordinals ; as, 
the first book (/) ; the second line; the third letter; 
the fourth chapter, etc. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Tills is a definitive adjective of the demonstrative kind, and 
belongs to the noun man, with which it agrees in number.— Rule 
VII, Note 4. 

(b) Tlaese is a definitive adjective of the demonstrative kind, 
plural number, and belongs to the noun men, with which it agrees. — 
Eule VII, Note 4. 

(c) i£ticli is a definitive adjective of the distributive kind, and 
agrees with hour in the singular. — Rule VII, Note 4. 

(d) Any is a definitive adjective of the indefinite kind, and be- 
longs to the noun person. — Rule VII. 

(e) One is a definitive adjective of the class of numerals, and the 
sub-class of cardinals, and agrees with the noun man in the singu- 
lar.— Rule VII, Note 4. 

(/) First is a definitive adjective of the class of numerals, and 
the sub-class of ordinals, and belongs to the noun book in the singu- 
lar.— Rule VII, Note 4. 

(c) Proper adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Demosthenes was an Athenian orator (a). 

2. Horace was a Latin poet. 

3. Scipio was a Roman general. 

4. Phidias was a Grecian sculptor. 

5. Michael Angelo was an Italian painter. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Athenian is a proper adjective derived from the proper 
noun Athens, and belongs to the noun orator. — Rule VII. 



ADJECTIVES. 85 

Section 2. 

Position of the adjectives. 
(a) The adjective placed immediately before its noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Night, sable (a) goddess, from her ebon (b) throne, 
In rayless majesty now stretches forth 

Her leaden scepter o'er a slumbering world. — 
Young. 

2. Vital spark of heavenly flame, 

Quit, O quit this mortal frame. — Pope. 

3. For who, to dumb forgetfulness a prey, 

This pleasing, anxious being e'er resigned, 
Left the warm precincts of the cheerful day, 

Nor cast one longing, lingering look behind?— 
Gray. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Sable is a descriptive adjective ; compared sable, more sable, 
most sable ; in the positive, and qualifies Night. — Rule VII. 

(b) Ebon is a descriptive adjective, not susceptible of compari- 
son, and qualifies the noun throne. — Rule VII. 

(b) The adjective placed immediately after the noun or 
pronoun which it qualifies. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. We have bread enough. 

2. Hammering renders metals brittle. 

3. The public promenade is a thing unknown to the 
ancients. 



86 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

4. He who violates the laws renders himself liable to 
be punished. 

5. All men agree to call vinegar sour, honey sweet, 
and aloes bitter. 

6. Virtue renders life happy. 

7. They preserved their privileges inviolate. 

8. Attention held them mute. 

9. Attention held his looks suspense. — Milton. 

10. Shall I call that man free who has nothing that 
is his own ? 

11. Joseph made himself strange to his brethren. 

12. The justice and expediency of the bill are such as 
to render it self-evident. — Lord Mansfield. 

13. Speculative ideas of general benevolence may float 
in the head, leaving the heart cold and untouched. — 
Blair. 

14. He entered the grove, and found the coolness and 
verdure irresistibly pleasant. — Dr. Johnson. 

15. He led captivity captive. 

(c) Adjectives after intransitive and passive verbs. 
1. After the verb to be. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The rose is red (a). 2. The lily is white. 3. I 
am content. 4. They are dissatisfied. 5. The sky was 
cloudy. 6. The weather was cold. 

7. The girls were present. 8. The boys were absent. 
9. The window is open. 10. The door is shut. 11. The 
winter is past. 12. The rain is over. 



ADJECTIVES. 87 

13. The task is easy. 14. The labor is light. 15. The 
lessons were hard. 16. The problems were difficult. 
17. The grass is wet with dew. 18. My fingers are 
numb with cold. 

19. Brutes are devoid of reason. 20. Canada is sub- 
ject to England. 21. I am glad to see my friends. 
22. AVe are liable to be deceived. 23. I am apt to 
make mistakes. 

24. The boys are fast asleep. 25. The girls were wide 
awake. 26. The traveler was afraid of robbers. 27. His 
conduct was very strange. 

28. The widows of Ashur are loud in their wail. — 
Byron. 

29. We love what is agreeable, and hate what is dis- 
agreeable. 

30. The men were wont to watch. 

31. The lances [were] unlifted, 

The trumpets [were] unblown. — Byron. 

2. Hephsestion, being at that time resident with two 
young men of distinction, offered them the kingdom. — 
Trans, from Quintus Curtius. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Ited is .an adjective; compared red, redder, reddest. Found 
in the positive degree, forming with the copula is the predicate of 
the proposition, and qualifies the subj. rose. — Kule VII. 

2. After other intransitive verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The sky became cloudy (a). 

2. The weather grew cold. 



88 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

3. The patient seems better. 

4. It was feared that the weather would prove unpro- 
pitious. 

5. We should not sit unconcerned while our liberty is 
invaded. 

6. The beggar walked barefooted. 

7. Omar, the son of Hassan, lived unmarried. 

8. How long I remained insensible, I can not tell. 

9. The eyes of the sleepers waxed deadly and chill, 
And their hearts but once heaved, and forever grew 

still. — Byron. 

10. His eye had got dim, and his heart [ ] faint. 

11. Those names have become historical. 

12. He (Obidah) stood pensive and confused, afraid to 
go forward, yet conscious that the time of loitering was 
past. 

13. We enter the gardens of pleasure, but enter tim- 
orous and trembling. — Dr. Johnson. 

14. Boabdil bowed his head, and remained a moment 
silent. — Bulwer. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Cloudy is an adjective; compared cloudy, cloudier, cloudiest. 
Found in the positive degree, forming with became the predicate of 
the proposition, and qualifies the subj. sky. — Rule VII. 

3. After passive verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The chamber was left vacant (a). 

2. The carriage was made strong. 



ADJECTIVES. 89 

3. The machine was rendered worthless by the acci- 
dent. 

4. A house should be kept clean. 

5. The measure was considered prudent. 

6. That course of procedure was thought advisable. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Vacant is an adjective, not susceptible of comparison. It 
forms with was left the predicate of the proposition, and qualifies the 
subj. chamber. — Rule VII. 

(d) Adjectives connected ivith the subject of the proposition 
by a complex copula consisting of two intransitive verbs, or 
of an intransitive and, a passive verb, the former verb in each 
case being a finite verb, and the latter an infinitive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Queen Mary, who appears to have been incapable 
(a) of generosity or clemency, determined to remove 
every person from whom the least danger could be ap- 
prehended. 

2. The quality of this cloth appears to be good. 

3. The proposition seemed to be fair. 

4. The act was thought to be justifiable. 

5. The division of the property was designed to be 
equitable. 

6. Special vigilance was thought to have become un- 
necessary. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Incapable is an adjective, not susceptible of comparison. 
It forms with the complex copula appears to have been the grammat- 
ical predicate of the proposition, and qualifies the subject who — 
Eule VII. 

P. M.— 8. 



90 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 3. 

Two or more adjectives qualifying the same noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Plain, honest (a) truth needs no artificial covering. 

2. Religion gives a native and unaffected ease to our 
behavior. 

3. Ulysses was a wise, eloquent, cautious, and intrepid 
hero. 

4. When you see any one who is either rich or beauti- 
ful, and who is yet unkind, ungenerous, or wicked, re- 
member the deadly-nightshade. 

5. When you see any one who is innocent, pure, and 
true, though [(aj] humble and poor, remember the fra- 
grant but unpretending violet. 

(a) Supply "he may be." 

6. How frightful | | the grave, how deserted and 
drear [ ] ! 

7. How lovely, how sweet [ ] the repose of the tomb ! 

8. The person of Washington was tall and command- 
ing; his chest was broad and full; his limbs were- long 
and somewhat slender, but they were well-shaped and 
muscular ; his features were regular and symmetrical, 
and his countenance was grave, placid, and benignant. 

9. His (Caled's) chamber was filled with visitants, 
eager [(a)] to catch the dictates of experience, and 
officious [(a)] to pay the tribute of admiration. 

(a) Supply for, and parse the infinitives to catch and to pay as 
nouns. 

10. Henry looked poor and wretched. 



ADJECTIVES. 91 

11. A star, single and beautiful, stepped forth into the 
firmament. 

12. The path of truth is a plain and safe path. 

13. A great and good man looks beyond time. 

14. Xovelty produces in the mind a vivid and agree- 
able impression. 

15. Xo single object appears solitary and void of con- 
nection. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

' (a) Plain and honest are adjectives in the positive degree, 
qualifying the noun truth. — Rule VII. 

Section ±. 

An adjective qualifying a complex term, consisting of a 
noun and adjective taken together. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A pretty little girl (a). 

2. A poor old woman. 

3. O for a lodge in some vast wilderness! (b). 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) liittle is an adjective ; compared little, less, least. It is in 
the positive degree, and qualifies girl. — Rule VII. 

Pretty is an adjective; compared pretty, prettier, prettiest. It is 
in the positive degree, and qualifies little girl. —Rule VII, Xote 2. 

(6) Vast is a descriptive adjective, not compared, and qualifies 
wilderness. — Rule VII. 

Souie is a definitive adjective, and limits vast icildemess. — Rule 
VII, Note 2. 



92 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 5. 

An adjective qualifying, at the same time, a noun and a 
verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The fire burns blue (a). 

2. The wind blows cold. 

3. Open your mouth wide. 

4. The hammock swung loose at the sport of the 
wind. 

5. 'Tis done! dread Winter spreads his latest gloom, 
And reigns tremendous o'er the conquered year. — 

Thomson. 

6. A field of the dead rushes red on my sight. — Scott. 

7. A new broom sweeps clean. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Slue is an adjective ; compared blue, bluer, bluest. It qual- 
ifies the noun fire, and also modifies the verb burns. — Kule VII, 
Note 3. 

Section 6. 

Verbs in the present infinitive passive used as adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The cattle are to be fed. 

2. The cows are to be milked. 

3. The children are to be prepared for school. 

4. There is much work yet to be done. 

5. The money is yet to be collected. 



ADJECTIVES. 93 

6. A thousand dollars are to be raised. 

7. Vice is to be shunned. 

8. Virtue is to be praised. 

9. There arrived a period in which the earth was to be 
called (a) into existence. — Blair. 

10. The gentleness which belongs to virtue is to be 
carefully distinguished from the mean spirit of cowards, 
and from the fawning assent of sycophants. — Blair. 

11. There may be planets which are yet to be discov- 
ered. 

12. Those vast riches which cover the face of your 
soil, as well as those which are hid in its bosom, are to 
be developed and [ ] gathered only by the skill and en- 
terprise of men. — Patrick Henry. 

13. His terrified imagination uttered horrors not to be 
repeated, or ever [to be] forgotten. — Young. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) To be called is a verb ; reg., trans., pass, voice, inf., pres., 
and is used as an adjective, forming with was the predicate of the 
proposition, and qualifying the subj. earth. 



Section 7. 

Compound adjectives. 

(a) Adjectives composed of a noun and a past participle 
passive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. An iron-clad (a) ship. 2. A sugar-coated pill. 
3. A doud-capped tower. 4. A snow-crowned mount- 
ain. 5. A bed-ridden patient. 6. A panic-stricken 



94 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

throng. 7. A blood-stained sword. 8. A time-honored 
custom. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Iron-clad is a compound adjective, consisting of the noun 
iron and the participle clad, and modifying the noun ship. — Rule 
VII. 

(b) Adjectives composed of an adjective and a past parti- 
ciple, passive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A sweet-scented (a) flower. 2. A rich-flavored 

fruit. 3. A hoary-headed sire. 4. A rosy-cheeked 

maiden. 5. A dark-skinned Moor. 6. A hard-hearted 
wretch. 

7. A wide-mouthed vial. 8. A narrow-necked bottle. 
9. A broad-brimmed hat. 10. A one-bladed knife. 11. 
A two-edged sword. 12. A three-legged stool. 13. A 
thin-soled shoe. 14. A high-heeled boot. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Sweet-scented is a compound adjective, consisting of the 
adjective sweet and of the past passive participle scented, and qualifies 
the noun flower. — Rule VII. 

(c) Adjectives composed of an adverb and a past participle 
passive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A down-trodden people. 2. A hard-earned pit- 
tance. 3. A dear-bought victory. 4. An ill-gotten 
treasure. 5. A well-spent life. 6. A full-blown (a) 
rose. 7. A half-learned lesson. 



ADJECTIVES. 95 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Full-blown is a compound adjective, consisting of the 
past passive participle blown and of the adverb full, and qualifying 
rose. — Kule VII. 

(d) Adjectives composed of an adverb and a present active 
participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A high-sounding title. 2. A swift-shooting meteor. 
3. A bright-shining light. 4. A clear-sounding bell. 
5. An over-hanging rock. 6. An out-standing account. 
7. The in-coming administration. 

8. Flocks thick-nibbling through the clovered vale. — 
Thomson. 

9. Forth from thy cave, wide-roaming thou dost come, 
To hold nocturnal orgies. 

Suggestion. — In parsing compound words, let the pupil be al- 
ways required to tell their composition. 

(e) Adjectives composed of a noun and a present active 
participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A life-giving power. 2. A soul-cheering thought. 
3. A pain-relieving medicine. 4. Heart-rending anguish. 
5. Heaven-daring impiety. 6. Earth -gazing re very. 

(f ) Adjectives composed of a noun and an adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A blood-red cloud. 2. A snow-white fleece. 3. A 
pea-green jacket. 4. A sky-blue eye. 5. An ice-cold 
fountain. 6. A thread-bare garment. 7. An air-tight 
vessel. 8. A love-sick swain. 



96 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

(g) Adjectives composed of two adjectives, the jirst quali- 
fying the secojid. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A pale-red flower. 2. A dark-green dress. 3. A 
bright-red ribbon. 4. A red-hot iron. 

(h) Adjectives composed of a preposition and its object 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The under-ground railroad. 2. The over-land route. 
3. Out-of-doors work. 4. An out-of-the-way place. 

(i) Adjectives composed of a verb and its object. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A lack-luster eye. 2. A do-nothing policy. 3. The 
know-nothing party. 

(k) Compound proper nouns used as adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A New England farmer. 2. A South Carolina 
planter. 3. The Hudson's Bay company. 



Section 8. 

Phrases used as adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A good-for-nothing fellow. 2. A well-to-do farmer. 
3. A long-to-be-remembered day. 4. A never-to-be- 



ADJECTIVES. 97 

forgotten^ calamity. 5. An out-of-the-way place. 6. An 
every-day occurrence. 



Section 9. 

Promiscuous sentences for practice in the parsing of the 
adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Fervid on the glittering flood, 

Now the noon-tide radiance glows. — Cunningham. 

2. In arms he shines, conspicuous from afar. — Pope's 
Horn. Iliad. 

3. Unmoved the embodied Greeks their fury dare. — 
Pope's Horn. Iliad. 

4. Thus obstinate to death they fight, they fall. — 
Pope's Horn. Iliad. 

5. Fierce as a whirlwind, up the wall he flies. — Pope's 
Horn. Iliad. 

6. He moves a god, resistless in his course. — Pope's 
Horn. Iliad. 

7. Here rests his head upon the lap of earth, 

A youth to fortune and to fame unknown. — Gray. 

8. Such is the fashion. 

9. [(a)] Ten paces huge he back recoiled. — Wilton. 
(a) Supply ''through the space of." 

10. God ever blest, and his divine behests obey, 
Worthiest to be obeyed. — Milton. 

11. Of how many more will the same remark prove 
true? 

12. O'er weed-covered fragments still fearless she 
passed. — Southey. 

P. M.— 9. 



98 THE PARSER'S MAX UAL. 

13. In a town of industrious people the streets would 
be clean ; the houses [ ] neat and comfortable ; the 
tavern would be silent, and for the most part empty, or 
a welcome retreat to the weary traveler. 

14. A wide sea-voyage makes us conscious of being 
cast loose from the secure anchorage of settled life, and 
[ ] sent adrift upon a doubtful world. It interposes a 
gulf, not merely imaginary, but real, between us and our 
homes ; a gulf subject to tempests, and fears, and uncer- 
tainty, that makes distance palpable, and return precari- 
ous. — Irving. 

15. She (the widow of Marco Bozzaris) w T as under [ ] 
forty [(a)], tall and stately in person, and habited in deep 
black, fit emblem of her widowed condition. 

(a) Supply the ellipses thus : " She was under [the age of] forty 

[years]." 

16. On the eighth [ ] of November, from the high- 
land, [(&)] about fourteen miles distant, I first saw 
Rome. 

(a) Supply " which is." 

17. I observed a youth of a lively look, a piercing eye, 
and something fiery and irregular in all his movements 

(«)• 

(a) S©metfiii&|£ is an adverb, qualifying the adjectives fiery aud 
irregular. — Rule VII. 

18. One, tw T o, three, and at its last enlargement by 
Constantine, more than three hundred thousand persons 
could be seated in the Circus Maximus. 

ELLIPSES SUPPLIED. 

One (a), two, three [hundred thousand persons could 
be seated], and at its last enlargement by Constantine, 
more [persons (&)] than three hundred thousand persons 
(c) [are] could be seated in the Circus Maximus. 



ADJECTIVES. 99 

(a) One is a numeral adjective of the cardinal kind, limiting the 
noun hundred understood. 

One hundred is a numeral adjective, limiting the noun thou- 
sand understood. 

One hundred thousand is a numeral adjective, limiting 
the noun persons understood. 

(b) Persons, understood, is the subject of could be seated, ex- 
pressed. 

(c) Persons, expressed, is the subject of are, understood. 

19. One hundred and fifty Ohio State Reform-Farm 
Sunday-school scholars were in town yesterday (a). 

(a) Scholars is a noun; com., 3d, plu., masc, nom., and subj. 
of the verb were. — Rule VIII. 

Sunday is a noun used as an adjective to qualify the noun 
school. — Rule VII. 

Sunday-school is a compound noun used as an adjective to 
qualify the noun scholars. — Rule VII. 

Farm is a noun ; com., 3d, sing., neut,, and constitutes the basis 
of the compound noun reform-farm. 

Reform is a noun used as an adjective to qualify the noun 
farm.— Rule VII. 

Reform-Farm is a compound noun used as an adjective to 
qualify the complex noun Sunday-school scholars. — Rule VII. 

State is a noun used as an adjective to qualify the compound 
noun reform-farm. — Rule VII. 

Ohio is a noun used as an adjective to qualify the complex noun 
state reform-farm. — Rule VII. 

Ohio State Reform-Farm is a complex adjective, qualify- 
ing the complex noun Sunday-school scholars. — Rule VII. 

One is a numeral adjective of the cardinal kind, and qualifies 
the noun hundred. — Rule VII. 

Hundred is a noun used as the basis of the complex numeral 
adjective one hundred. 

One hundred is a complex numeral adjective, and is a part 
of the compound numeral one hundred and fifty. 



100 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Fifty is a simple numeral, and is a part of the compound nu- 
meral one hundred and fifty. 

One luiiidredL and fifty is a compound numeral adjective, 
qualifying the complex noun Ohio State Reform- Farm Sunday -school 
scholars. — Kule VII. 



ARTICLE XIII. 



THE PAETICIPLES. 

Section 1. 

The present active participle, 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I saw the sun rising (a). 2. I see the moon setting. 
3. I heard the wind roaring. 4. I felt the earth shaking. 

5. The king, extending his scepter, commanded the 
suppliant to rise. 

6. Nouns denoting males are of the masculine gender. 

7. We heard the stones rumbling along the sides of the 
descent. 

8. The horses sank upon their knees, dismounting (hi) 
their riders (c). 

9. We gazed upon the clouds marshaling themselves 
like bloody giants in the sky. 

10. A friendly voice was that old, old clock, 

As it stood in the corner smiling; 

And blessed the time 

With a merry chime, 
The wintry hours beguiling. 



THE PARTICIPLES. 101 

11. Two guests sat enjoying the fire, that burned 

bright ; 
And smiling in silence, with tranquil delight, 
They listened to hear the wind roar. 

12. The waves behind impel the waves before, 
Wide-rolling (d), foaming high, and tumbling to 

the shore. 



MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Rising is the pres. act. part, of the irreg. intrans. verb to 
rise, and relates to sun as its subject. — Rule XI. 

(b) Dismounting is the pres. act. part, of the reg. trans, verb 
to dismount, and relates to horses as its subject. — Rule XL 

(c) Riders is a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by the participle 
dismounting. — Rule III. 

(d) Wide-rolling is an adjective, composed of the participle 
rolling and the adverb wide, and qualifies the noun waves. — Rule 
VII. 

Section 2. 

The present active participle used in connection with the 
verb to be. 

EXAMPLES. 

I. The moon is rising (a). 2. I am writing. 3. We 
are reading. 4. She was singing. 5. They were walk- 
ing. 6. I have been sleeping. 

7. James has been walking. 8. He had been traveling. 
9. The boys will be playing. 10. The men will have 
been laboring. 

II. The girls may be sewing. 12. The women may 
have been knitting. 13. Thomas might be studying. 
14. The men might have been laboring. 



102 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Is rising is a verb; irreg., intrans., indie, pres., progressive 
form, 3d, sing., and agrees with its subject moon. — Kule IX. 

Section 3 
The present active participle used as an adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I saw the rising (a) sun. 

2. I viewed the setting moon. 

3. I heard the roaring wind. 

4. We walked through sloping woodlands. 

5. Cataracts poured down from the lowering firma- 
ment. 

6. The quivering beasts reared and snorted. 

7. The cataract became a falling ocean. 

8. The indications of an approaching tempest became 
manifest. 

9. There was not a quiver among the sleeping waters, 
to tell of the coming storm. 

10. The story was too touching to be soon forgotten. 

11. But in his whole history there is no circumstance 
so striking and interesting as his behavior to his breth- 
ren, who had sold him into slavery. — Blair. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Rising is the pres. act. part, of the irreg. intrans. verb to 
rise, and is here used as an adjective to qualify the noun sun. — 
Eule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Kising is a participial adjective, qualifying the noun sun. — 
Eule VII. 



THE PARTICIPLES. 103 

Section 4. 

Alternate sentences in which the same word is used first as 
a present participial noun, and then as a noun simply. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Sails and ropes are used in rigging a ship. 

2. The wind whistled through the rigging of the ship. 

3. The bully succeeded in flooring his antagonist. 

4. The carpenter bought two thousand feet of flooring. 

5. Jacob, in blessing the sons of Joseph, placed his 
hands upon their heads. 

6. Health is a great blessing. 

7. The clerk is engaged in footing up the account. 

8. Both parties were placed on an equal footing. 

9. The general succeeded in heading the march of the 
enemy. 

10. I read the heading of the chapter. 

11. He found much difficulty in understanding the 
subject. 

12. The understanding is the faculty by wdiich we are 
enabled to apprehend the objects of knowledge. — Watts. 

13. In beginning the day, we should implore Divine 
guidance and protection. 

14. In the beginning, God created the heavens and the 
earth. 

15. James is engaged in writing a letter. 

16. Mary's writing is very beautiful. 

17. Thomas is engaged in reading the history of Eng- 
land. 

18. I have seen a different reading of this text. 



104 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 5. 

Alternate sentences in which a word ending in ing, and 
following the verb to be, is to be parsed in the first example 
as a participle, forming with the verb to be a verb in the 
progressive form, and in the second example is to be parsed 
separately as an adjective qualifying the subject of the verb 

TO BE. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The star is twinkling in the sky. 

2. The light of the fixed stars is a twinkling light. 

3. The orator was thrilling his hearers by his elo- 
quence. 

4. The effect of the music was thrilling. 

5. The diamond is sparkling in the light. 

6. The brilliancy of the diamond is sparkling. 

7. The sun is dazzling my eyes. 

8. The splendor of the sun is dazzling. 

9. The teacher was interesting his pupils with a story. 

10. The story told by the teacher was interesting. 

11. The speaker is convincing his audience. 

12. The logic of the speaker is convincing* 

Section 6, 

The past participle passive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A penny saved (a) is as good as a penny earned. 

2. When the signal moment, predestined from all 
eternity, arrived, the Deity arose in his might, and with 
a word created the world. 



THE PARTICIPLES. 105 

3. One of the earthquakes most particularly described 
in history, is that which occurred in 1693. — Goldsmith. 

4. The righteous man shall flourish like a tree planted 
by the rivers of water. — Blair. 

5. With eyes upraised, like one inspired, 
Pale Melancholy sat retired. — Collins. 

6. Hands of angels, hidden from mortal eyes, shifted 
the scenery of the heavens. 

7. The student was a man advanced in years. 

8. Truths divine came mended from his tongue. 

9. The elephant found the orator fox caught in a trap, 
w T ith both his legs broken, and sadly mangled. 

10. The word of command seemed smothered in the 
atmosphere. 

11. I had now nothing left but retirement. 

12. We wish to see him (King Alfred) delineated in 
more lively colors. — Hume. 

13. True gentleness is native feeling heightened and 
improved by principle. — Blair. 

14. Behold, I go bound in the spirit to Jerusalem. 

15. I am sorry that a bill, fraught (6) with so many 
good consequences, has not found an abler advocate. — 
Lord Mansfield. 

16. Neglected as he w 7 as by the world, he possessed, 
perhaps, both a sound understanding and a worthy 
heart. — Blair. 

17. Ortogrul admired the walls hung with golden tap- 
estry, and the floors covered with silken carpets. — Dr. 

Johnson. 

18. I sat down on the fragment of a rock overgrown 
with moss. — Spectator. 



106 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

19. He (Obidah) found a narrow way bordered with 
flowers, which appeared to have the same direction with 
the main road. — Dr. Johnson. 

20. Aristotle tells us that a statue lies hid in a block 
of marble. — Id. 

MODELS FOK PARSING. 

(a) Saved is the past part. pass, of the reg. trans, verb to save, 
and relates to penny as its subject. — Eule XI. 

(b) Fraugiit is the past part, of the irreg. trans, verb to freight, 
and relates to bill as its subject. — Rule XI. 

Section 7. 
The past participle passive used as an adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The supposed (a) statue of a giant presented itself 
to view. 

2. A mingled expression of grief and anger passed 
over the face of the savage, as he watched the loaded 
canoe in its passage across the stream. 

3. The results of indolence upon communities are as 
marked as they are upon individuals. 

4. I hastily seized it, unfit as it was 

For a nosegay, so dripping and drowned [(6)], 
And shaking it rudely — too rudely, alas! 

I snapped it : it fell to the ground. — The Rose, by 
Coivper. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Supposed is the past part. pass, of the reg. trans, verb to 
suppose, and is used here as an adjective to qualify the noun statue. — 
Rule VIL 



THE PARTICIPLES. 107 

(b) Supply "as it was." 

Drowned is a part., etc., used as an adj. to qualify the pronoun 
it— Rule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Drowned is a participial adjective, qualifying the pronoun it. — 
Rule VII. 



Section 8. 

The perfect active participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Having taken (a) leave (b) of his friends, he set 
out upon his journey. 

2. Having regained his health, he returned to the 
army. 

3. Having lost his equilibrium, the acrobat fell to the 
ground. 

4. Having missed his way, he did not arrive in sea- 
son. 

5. Having hired a boat in company with four more, 
we launched from the harbor of St. Francis, in Sicily, 
and arrived on the same day at Pelorus. — Goldsmith. 

6. Having given him (Lord Guilford) from the window 
some token of her remembrance, she (Lady Jane Gray) 
waited with tranquillity till her own appointed hour should 
bring her the same fate. — Hume. 

7. Having sold his patrimony, Ortogrul engaged in 
merchandise. — Dr. Johnson. 

8. Having thus calmed his solicitude, he (Obidah) re- 
newed his pace, though he suspected he was not gaining 
ground. — Id. 



108 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Having talien is the perf. act. part, of the irreg. trans, 
verb to take, and relates to he as its subject,— Rule XI. 

(b) lieave is a noun, etc., in the obj. case, and governed by hav- 
ing taken. — Rule III. 

Section 9. 

The present passive participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Being provided (a) with a ladder and flambeau, 
our whole party entered into the same opening. — Gold- 
smith. 

2. Our candles being now all lighted up, and the 
whole place [being] completely illuminated, never could 
the eye be presented with a more magnificent scene. — 
Goldsmith. 

3. The sun being risen (b), we pursued our journey. 

4. Ortogrul mingled with the attendants, and being 
supposed to have some petition for the vizier, was per- 
mitted to enter. — Dr. Johnson. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Being provided is the pres. part. pass, of the reg. trans, 
verb to provide, and relates to party as its subject. — Rule XI. 

(b) Heiiag risen is the pres. part. pass, form of the irreg. in- 
trans. verb to rise, and relates to sun as its subject. — Rule XI. 

Remark. — Intransitive verbs can never be in the passive voice, 
but they may sometimes have the passive form. (See Article XIV, 
10.) 



THE PARTICIPLES. 109 

Section 10. 

Alternate sentences in which the same word is used first as 

a first past participle, and then as a verb in the first past 
tense, of the indicative mode. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The traveler met a bear robbed of her whelps. 

2. The hunter robbed a bear of her whelps. 

3. I met a child wrapped in a shawl. 

4. I -wrapped the child in a shawl. 

5. I saw a horse covered with a blanket. 

6. The man covered the horse with a blanket. 

7. I saw a lamb decked with ribbons. 

8. The little girl decked her lamb with ribbons. 

9. He wore a vest striped with red and blue. 

10. The weaver striped the cloth with red and blue. 

Section 11. 
The perfect participle passive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Having been badly hurt (a) by a fall, he was una- 
ble to attend to his business. 

2. The corn having been planted too late, had not 
time to mature. 

3. The foundation having been undermined by the 
water, the building fell. 

4. Having been deprived of rest last night, I feel un- 
well to-day. 



110 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

5. The mail having been delayed, I did not receive his 
letter in season. 

6. The hay having been exposed to the rain, was 
damaged. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Having been hurt is the perf. part. pass, of the irreg. 

trans, verb to hurt, and relates to he as its subject. — Kule XI. 



Section 12. 

The past participle passive changed into an adjective by 
prefixing the syllable un. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Then settle the account with thy conscience for 
every past benefit unrequited, and for every past endear- 
ment unregarded. 

2. The brook slipped away unheard and unseen. 

3. But the dominion of Indolence was constant and 
unremitted, and seldom [ ] resisted, till resistance was in 
vain. — Spectator. 

4. In these amusements the hours passed away un- 
counted. — Dr. Johnson. 

5. With passions unruffled, untainted with pride, 
By reason my life let me guide. 

6. These, then, though un beheld in deep of night, 
Shine not in vain; nor think, though men were 

none (a), 
That heaven would want spectators, God want 
praise. — Milton. 

(a) None is an adjective, qualifying men. 



THE PARTICIPLES. Ill 

Section 13. 

The participles., 

PROMISCUOUS EXAMPLES. 

1. As we proceeded, new wonders offered themselves: 
the spars [(a)], formed into trees and shrubs, pre- 
sented a kind of petrified grove ; some [(a)] white, 
some [(a)] green, and all receding in due perspective. — 
Goldsmith, 

(a) Supply " being." 

Note. — Soine is an adjective used as a noun ; com., 3d, plu., 
neut., and nom. absolute in connection with the participle being un- 
derstood. — Kule V, JSote 5. 

2. We made an experiment by throwing down stones, 
which (a) rumbling along the sides of the descent for 
some time, the sound seemed at last quashed in a bed 
of water. 

(a) Which is a pronoun; rel., 3d, plu., agreeing with its ante- 
cedent stones. — Rule VI. Which is in the nom. absolute in connec- 
tion with the participle rumbling. 

3. The frightened animals of the plain, almost suffo- 
cated by the impetuosity of the wind, sought shelter and 
found destruction. 

4. The horses dashed madly forward, beast and rider 
] blinded by the impetuosity of the gushing rain, and 

gasping for breath. 

5. In another place you witness opulent cities taken 
by storm ; the streets, filled on a sudden with slaughter 
and blood, resounding with the cries of the pursuing (a) 
and the pursued (b) ; the palaces of the nobles demol- 
ished ; the houses of the rich pillaged ; and every age, 
sex, and rank mingled in promiscuous massacre and 
ruin. 



112 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

(a) Pursuing is the pres. act. part, of the reg. trans, verb to 
pursue. It is here equivalent to a noun signifying persons ivho 
pursue, and is com., 3d, plu., masc., obj., and governed by of. — 
Kule IV. 

(b) Pursued is the past part. pass, of the reg. trans, verb to 
pursue. It is here equivalent to a noun signifying persons who are 
pursued, and is com., 3d, plu., masc, obj., and governed by of. — 
Eule IV. 

6. I imagined myself to be a horse hanging poised on 
the brink of a precipice. 

7. All kept gazing, weeping, and wringing their hands 
in vain, rooted to the' ground, or running backward and 
forward like so many ants in discomfiture. — Wilson. 

8. I found myself approaching a Bedouin Arab 
mounted on a camel, and attended by another Bedouin 
on foot. 

9. From the tower, 
Ruined and rent, the note of boding owl is heard. 

10. When all thy mercies, O my God, 

My rising soul surveys, 
Transported with the view, I'm lost 
In wonder, love, and praise. — Addison. 

11. Man, in his highest earthly glory, is but a reed 
floating on the stream of time, and forced to follow every 
new direction of the current. 

12. The man of true fortitude may be compared to 
the castle built on a rock, which defies the attack of 
surrounding waters : the man of feeble and timorous 
spirit, [ ] to a hut built on the shore, which every wind 
shakes and every wave overflows. 

13. The comet having a long train of light streaming 
behind her, could review that. — Montgomery. 

14. Trembling with wonder and delight in new-found 



THE PARTICIPLES. 113 

existence, she (the first star) looked abroad, and found 
nothing in heaven or earth resembling herself. — Mont- 
gomery. 

15. The little gleaming horn was again discerned, 
leaning backward over the western hills. — Montgomery. 

16. "What more (a) can she be?" thought the myri- 
ads of extinguished sparklers. — Montgomery. 

(a) More is an adjective, qualifying the interrogative pronoun 
what. — Rule VII. 

17. On opening their eyes, they were rejoiced at being 
together, not one (a) being wanting (6) of last night's 
levee. — Montgomery. 

(a) One is a noun, etc., in the nom. absolute in connection with 
the participle being. — Eule V, Note 5. 

(b) Wanting is a participial adjective, qualifying the noun 
one. — Rule VII. 

18. Dryden's page is a natural field, rising into ine- 
qualities, and diversified by the exuberance of an abun- 
dant vegetation : Pope's is the velvet lawn, shaven by the 
scythe and leveled by the roller. 

19. The sun, new-risen, 
Looks through the misty horizontal air, 
Shorn of his beams. 

20. It w^as the weighing of money against life ; the 
counting of so many pieces of silver against so many 
ounces of blood. — Webster. 

21. A glittering robe of glory, 

Set off abundant by the yellow ray, 
Invests the fields, and nature smiles revived. — 
Thomson. 

22. He (Hiempsal) lies full lone, gored with wounds, 
and festering in his own blood. — Trans, from Sallust. 

P. M.— 10. 



114 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

23. When Music, heavenly maid, was young, 
While yet in early Greece she sung, 
The Passions oft, to hear her shell, 
Thronged around her magic cell ; 
Exulting, trembling, raging, fainting, 
Possessed beyond the Muse's painting, 
By turns they felt the glowing mind 
Disturbed, delighted, raised, refined. — Collins. 

24. No human character exhibited in the records of 
Scripture is more remarkable than that of the patriarch 
Joseph. He is one whom we behold tried in all .the 
vicissitudes of fortune ; from the condition of a slave, 
rising to be the ruler of the land of Egypt ; and in 
every station acquiring, by his wisdom and virtue, favor 
with God and man. — Blair. 

25. The Gulf of Chary bdis, which we approached, 
seemed whirled round in such a manner as to form a 
vast hollow, verging to a point in the center. — Gold- 
smith. 

26. Our traveler being obliged to alight, instantly felt 
himself raised a foot from the ground. — Goldsmith. 

27. The birds flew about astonished, and the beasts 
ran howling from the hills. — Goldsmith. 

28. Not a foot-print of the former magnificence of the 
city was to be seen remaining. 

29. His (the rich man's) riches prevented not his 
sharing the same fate with the poor man. — Blair. 

30. One day we see carried along the coffin of the 
smiling infant ; the flower just nipped as it began to 
blossom in the parents' view. — Blair. 

31. The next day we see the young man, or the young 
woman, of blooming form and promising hopes, laid in 
an untimely grave. — Blair. 



PARSING OF VERBS. 115 

32. She saw her husband led to execution. — Hume, 

33. For, to return to our statue in the block of 
marble, we see it sometimes only begun to be chipped ; 
sometimes hewn, and but just sketched into a human 
figure ; sometimes we see the man appearing distinctly, 
in all his limbs and features ; and sometimes we find the 
figure wrought up to great elegancy. 



ARTICLE XIV. 



EXERCISES IN THE PARSING OF VERBS. 
Section 1. 

The indicative mode. 

(a) Let the pupil distinguish the tenses, persons, and 
numbers of the verbs in the following 

EXAMPLES : 

1. I have. Thou hast. He has. We have. You 
have. They have. I had. Thou hadst. I have had. 
Thou hast had. He has had. He hath had. We had 
had. I shall have. Thou wilt have. We shall have 
had. They will have had. 

2. I am. Thou art. He is. We are. I was. Thou 
wast. He was. We were. I have been. Thou hast 
been. He has been. She hath been. You had been. 
I shall be. You will be. I shall have been. Thou 
wilt have been. They will have been. 

3. I move. I moved. I have moved. I had moved. 
I shall move. I shall have moved. 



116 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

(b) In addition to the tenses, persons, and numbers, let 
the pupil distinguish the common, the emphatic, and the pro- 
gressive forms in the following 

examples : 

1. I walk. I do walk. I am walking. Thou walkest. 
Thou art walking. Thou dost walk. 

2. We walked. We did walk. We were walking. 
1 have walked. I have been walking. We had w T alked. 
We had been walking. 

3. I shall walk. I shall be walking. Thou wilt walk. 
Thou wilt be walking. We shall have walked. They 
will have been walking. 

(c) Exercises in which the pupil will distinguish between 
transitive and intransitive verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

I. The dog barks. 2. The cat catches mice. 3. The 
cock crows. 4. The hen lays eggs. 5. The lark sings. 

6. The hawk caught a chicken. 7. The horse ran fast. 
8. The cow ate the grass. 9. The wolf howled loud. 
10. The bear devoured the berries. 

II. James has learned his lesson. 12. George has 
studied well. 13. Susan had made a call. 14. Mary 
had gone out. 15. The girls will play together on the 
green. 16. The boys will play ball. 

(d) Alternate sentences in which the same verb is first nsed 
transitively, and then intransitively. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. George reads well. 2. Susan reads many good 
books. 3. Susan writes neatly. 4. Mary writes a neat 
hand. 



PARSING OF VERBS. 117 

5. The birds were singing sweetly. 6. The birds were 
singing their morning hymns. 7. James has been study- 
ing hard. 8. Peter has been studying his lesson. 

9. Julia plays on the guitar. 10. The boys play ball. 

11. Susan rides gracefully. 12. George rode the Shet- 
land pony. 

13. A star shot across the sky. 14. The hunter shot 
a deer. 15. The hare runs fast, 16. The hare and the 
tortoise ran a race. 

(e) Alternate sentences in which the same verb is first used 
in the active and then in the passive voice. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Every one loves a good child. 2. A good child is 
loved by every one. 3. James struck John. 4. John 
was struck by James. 

5. Somebody has robbed my house. 6. My house has 
been robbed by somebody. 7. I had known him for 
many years. 8. The fact had been known to me for a 
long time. 

9. Columbus discovered America. 10. America was 
discovered by Columbus. 11. Praise ye the Lord. 

12. The Lord's name be praised. 

(f) Exercises in which the pupil will distinguish between 
the passive voice and the progressive form of the active voice, 
or the progressive form of intransitive verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A letter was written by James. 2. James was 
writing a letter. 3. The work w r as performed by Henry. 
4. Henry was performing the work. 



118 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

5. The business is neglected by John. 6. John is 
neglecting his business. 7. The window has been broken 
by some one. 8. Some one has been breaking the 
window. 

Section 2. 

The potential mode. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I can read. 2. Thou mayst write. 3. He must 
go. 4. We must be going. 5. You may be thinking. 
6. They can be trying. 7. The work can be done. 8. 
The debt might be paid. 9. The letter should be sent. 

10. The work could not be accomplished. 11. The 
boy would not obey his mother. 12. We might be 
learning. 13. You should be studying. 

14. He may have been there. 15. It must have been 
she. 16. It can not have been so. 17. He must have 
been dreaming. 18. They may have been sleeping. 
19. It may have been injured. 20. It must have been 
lost. 

21. We could have performed the labor. 22. You 
should have returned sooner. 23. You might have been 
learning your lesson. 24. The child should not have 
been exposed to temptation. 25. The work could not 
have been sooner finished. 



Section 3. 

The uses of shall and will. 

1. When the auxiliaries shall and will simply foretell, 
the verb is in the future indicative. 



PARSING OF VERBS. 119 

2. When shall is used in commanding , forbidding, or 
threatening, or when will denotes purpose, the verb is in 
the potential mode. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I shall be (a) ten years old to-morrow, you will be 
(a) twelve, and James will be (a) nine. 

2. Will I be ten years old to-morrow, will you be 
twelve, and will James be nine? 

3. I shall be drowned, for nobody will help me. 

4. I will be drowned (b), for nobody shall help me 
(c). 

5. Will I be drowned, and will nobody try to save 
me? 

6. Ye will not come to me, that ye may have life. 

7. Thou shalt love thy neighbor as thyself. 

8. Thou shalt not kill. 

9. The scholars that violate the rules shall be pun- 
ished (d). 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Shall be and will foe are in the indicative mode, because 
the auxiliaries shall and will, in these examples, simply fortell. 

(b) Will be drowned is in the potential mode, because will, 
in this example, denotes purpose or determination. 

(c) Shall help is in the potential mode, because the drowning 
man prohibits all persons from attempting to save him. 

(d) Shall be punished is in the potential mode, because the 
auxiliary shall is here used in threatening. 



120 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 4 
The subjunctive mode. 

Eemaek 1. — The verbs which follow the conjunctions if, lest, 
unless, except, whether are always in the subjunctive mode. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. If ye love me, keep my commandments. 

2. Watch and pray, lest ye enter into temptation. 

3. Unless we eat, we shall die. 

4. Except ye repent, ye shall all likewise perish. 

5. Whether science, or business, or public life be your 
aim, virtue still enters for a principal share into all those 
great departments of society. — Blair. 

6. I was afraid lest I should be charged with ingrati- 
tude. — Dr. Johnson. 

7. No man can enter into a strong man's house and 
spoil his goods, except he will first bind the strong 
man. 

8. Here Obidah paused for a time, and began to con- 
sider whether it w^ere longer safe to forsake the known 
and common path. — Dr. Johnson. 

Remark 2. — When the verb which follows though or although 
expresses a supposition, it is in the subjunctive mode; but if it ex- 
presses an actual fact, it is in the indicative mode. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Though hand join in hand, the wicked shall not be 
unpunished. 

2. Though he slay me, yet will I trust in him. 

3. In the vine were three branches, as though it 
budded. 



PARSING OF VERBS. 121 

4. Although all shall be offended, yet will not I. 

5. Although I have many competitors, I still hope to 
succeed. 

6. What though the swelling surge thou see, 

Impatient to devour, 
Rest, mortal, rest on God's decree, 
And thankful own his power. 

Remark 3. — In the older English authors, the conjunctions till 
and until are followed by the subjunctive mode. In modern usage, 
these conjunctions are usually followed by the indicative forms of 
the verb. 

EXAMPLES OF THE ANCIENT USAGE. 

1. Till the heavens be no more, they shall not awake 
nor be raised out of their sleep. — Job xiv : 12. 

2. O that thou wouldest hide me in the grave, that 
thou wouldest keep me secret until thy wrath be past ! 
— Job xiv: 13. 

3. All the days of my appointed time will I wait till 
my change come. — Job xiv: 14. 

4. Occupy till I come. — Luke xix : 13. 

5. Of man's first disobedience, and the fruit 
Of that forbidden tree, whose mortal taste 
Brought death into the world, with all our woe, 
Y/lth loss of Eden, till one greater Man 
Restore us and regain the blissful seat, 

Sing, heavenly muse. — Milton's Paradise IjOsL 

EXAMPLES OF THE MODERN USAGE. 

1. I will wait till the mail arrives. 

2. I will wait till it is convenient for you to pay me. 

P. M.— 11. 



122 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Kemark 4. — The conjunction that is sometimes followed by the 
subjunctive mode. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. If J will (a) that he tarry (6) till I come (c), what 
is that to thee ? — John xxi : 22. 

(a) "Will is here not an auxiliary, but a principal verb in the 
subjunctive mode and present tense. 
(6) Tarry is subjunctive after that. 
(c) Come is subjunctive after till. 

2. O that my ways were directed to keep thy statutes. — 
Ps. cxix : 5. 

3. O that we now had here 

But one ten thousand of those men in England 
That do no work to-day. 

Remark 5. — The conjunction if is sometimes understood before 
a verb in the subjunctive mode. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Were I in your place, I w r ould not do so (a), 
(a) Read " If I were/' etc. 

2. Could we have foreseen the difficulty, we might 
have been prepared to grapple with it. 

3. Society, friendship, and love, 

Divinely bestowed upon man, 
O, had I the wings of a dove, 

, How soon would I taste you again! (a) — Coivper. 
(a) Read "O, if I had," etc. 

Remark 6. — Were used in the sense of would be is in the sub- 
junctive mode. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. It were a pity if all this outcry brought no custom- 
ers. — Hawiliorne. 



PAUSING OF VERBS. 123 

2. It were not just that Damon should suffer to de- 
liver me from the death which was designed not for him, 
but for me only. — Trans, from F melon. 

3. It were better to be eaten to death with rust than 
to be scoured to nothing. — Shakspeare. 

Section 5. 

The subjunctive mode. 

ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES. 

1. Had he had a thousand lives, they had in reason 
been all cast away. — Bunyau. 

2. I had rather than forty shillings I had here my 
book of songs and sonnets. — Shakspeare. 

3. Had we gone over, we had, for aught I know, been 
a spectacle for those that come after to behold. — Banyan. 

4. O, had his powerful destiny ordained 
Me some inferior angel, I had stood 

Then happy; no unbounded hope had raised am- 
bition. — Milton. 

5. Yet, gracious Charity, indulgent guest, 
Were not thy power exerted in my breast, 
A cymbal's sound were better than my voice, 
My faith were form, my eloquence were noise. 

Kemark 7. — Had used in the sense of would, or would have, is in 
the subjunctive mode. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I had rather go than stay. 

2. I had as lief they would put ratsbane in my mouth, 
as to attempt to stop it with security. — Shakspeare. 

3. I had as lief be hanged as go. — Id. 



124 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

4. I had rather be a dog, and bay the moon, 
Than such a Roman. — Shakspeare. 

5. I had not known sin but by the law. 

Section 6. 

The imperative mode. 
(a) The second person. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Be thou faithful unto death (a). 2. Hope thou in 
the Lord. 3. Honor [thou] thy father and thy mother. 

4. Remember [ ] thy Creator in the days of thy youth. 

5. Be ye, therefore, wise as serpents and harmless as 
doves. 6. Enter ye in at the strait gate. 

7. James, shut [ ] the door. 8. Susan, light [ ] the 
lamp. 9. Boys, come [ ] into the house. 10. Girls, go 
[ ] to school. 11. Reveal [ ] none of the secrets of thy 
friend. 12. Be [ ] faithful to his interests. 13. Forsake 
[ ] him not in adversity. 14. Abhor [ ] the thought of 
acquiring any advantage by his prejudice. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Be is a verb; irreg., intrans., imperative mode, 2d, sing., 
and agrees with its subject thou. — Rule IX. 

(b) The third person. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Be it enacted (a). 2. Be it so. 3. Hallowed be 
thy name. 4. Thy kingdom come. 5. Thy will be 
done. 

'6. Blessed be the man who first invented sleep. 



PARSING OF VERBS. 125 

7. All the charms of Sycorax, toads, beetles, bats, light 
on you. — Shakspeare. 

8. God of Zion, protect us. 

9. Heaven forbid. 

10. Blessing, honor, glory, and power be unto him 
that sitteth upon the throne. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Be enacted is a verb; reg., trans., pass., imper., and 3d 
sing., agreeing with its subject it. — Kule IX. 

(c) The first person. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Come (a) we now to his translation of the Iliad. — 
Pope. 

2. Proceed we, therefore, in our subject. — Pope. 

3. My soul, turn from them ; turn we to survey. — 
Goldsmith. 

4. Then turn we to her latest tribune's name. — Byron. 

5. Turn we a moment fancy's rapid flight. — Thomson. 

6. Cursed be I (b). — Shakspeare. 

7. He took her soft hand ere her mother could bar ; 
."Now tread we a measure!" said young Lochin- 

var. — Scott. 

8. And now wend w T e to yonder fountain. — Scott. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Come is a verb ; irreg., intrans., koper., 1st, plu., and agrees 
with its subject we. — Enle IX. 

(b) Be cursed is a verb ; reg., trans., pass., imper., 1st, sing., 
and agrees with its subject I. — Rule IX. 



126 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 7. 

The imperative mode. 

ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES. 

1. Begin, my soul, the exalted lay! 
Let each enraptured thought obey, 

And praise the Almighty's name ; 
Lo ! heaven and earth and sea and skies, 
In one melodious concert rise, 

To swell the inspiring theme. 

2. Ye (a) fields (6) of light, celestial plains (c), 
Where gay, transporting beauty reigns ; 

Ye scenes divinely fair, 
Your Maker's wondrous power proclaim ; 
Tell (d) how he formed your shining frame, 

And breathed the fluid air. 

3. Ye angels, catch the thrilling sound, 
While all adoring thrones around 

His boundless mercy sing; 
Let every listening saint above 
Wake all the tuneful soul of love, 

And touch the sweetest string. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Ye is a pronoun ; pers., 2d, plu., and noni. independent by 
wa)' of address. — Eule V, Note 1. 

(b) Fields is a noun, etc. ; 2d, plu., and nom. independent, it 
being in apposition with ye, which is in that case. — Rule I. 

(c) Plains is a noun, etc. ; 2d, plu., and nom. independent, in 
apposition with fields. — Rule I. 

(d) Tell is a verb, etc. ; imper., 2d, plu., and agrees with its 
subject ye understood. — Rule IX. 



PARSING OF VERBS. 127 

Section 8. 

The construction of the infinitive mode. 

(a) Verbs in the infinitive mode used as nouns. (See Article I.) 

(6) Verbs in the infinitive mode used as adjectives. (See Article 
XII, 6.) 

(c) Verbs in the infinitive mode used as adverbs. (See Article 
XV, 8.) 

(d) The infinitive attribute. (See Article XXVIII.) 

(e) The infinitive as attributive object. (See Article XXVI, 2.) 

(/) Infinitives followed by the nominative absolute. .(See Arti- 
cle V, 1 and 5.) 

(g) Infinitives construed with the correlatives so as. (See 

Article XXIX.) 

(h) Infinitives preceded by the correlatives other than. 

(See Article XXX.) 

(i) Infinitives used abstractly. (See Article XXXIV.) 

Section 9. 

Intransitive verbs having a passive form. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The sun is set (a). 

2. The moon is risen. 

3. Give us of your oil, for our lamps are gone out. 

4. O time, time! how art thou fled forever! — Young. 

5. All now are vanished, virtue sole survives! 

6. The time is now come, fathers, when that which 
has been long wished for toward allaying the envy your 
order has been subject to, is effectually put into your 
power. — Trans, from Cicero. 



128 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

7. Babylon is fallen, is fallen, and is become the hab- 
itation of devils. 

8. This excellent young personage was descended from 
the royal line of England by both her parents. 



MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Is set is a verb; irreg., intrans., indie, pres. It lias the 
passive form, and agrees with its subj. sun in the 3d, sing. — Eule 
IX. 



Section 10. 

Compound verbs. 
(a) Verbs compounded with up. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The enemy tore up (a) the track. 2. The clerk 
cast up the accounts. 3. The merchant packed up his 
goods. 4. The sick man gave up the ghost. 

5. The church officers took up a collection. 6. The 
parties patched up a peace. 7. The dog scared up a 
hare. 8. The carriages blocked up the road. 

9. The army sent up a shout. 10. The wine was 
bottled up for use. 11. The rogue was shut up in the 
jail. 12. The water was drawn up from the well. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Tore up is a compound verb ; irreg., trans., indie, 1st past, 
3d, sing., agreeing with its subj. enemy. 

OTHERWISE. 

Tore is a verb, etc., and up is an adverb qualifying tore. — Eule 
XIII. 



PARSING OF VERBS. 129 

(b) Verbs compounded with down. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The champion threw down the gauntlet. 2. The 
workmen tore down the house. 3. The cannon battered 
down the wall. 4. The boy came down from the tree. 

5. The clock ran down in the night. 

(c) Verbs compounded ivith out. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The two friends fell out with each other. 2. The 
ladies came out to take a walk. 3. The general carried 
out his plan. 4. James will set out to-morrow upon his 
journey. 

5. The inventor took out a patent for his machine. 

6. The thief was found out. 7. The scribe left out a 
letter. 8. Thomas has let out the cat. 9. James had 
shut out the dog. 

10. Peter will drive out the pigs. 11. The hostler 

cleaned out the stall. 12. The child tore out a leaf. 

13. The laborers dug out the rock. 14. The dentist 

pulled out the tooth. 15. The gentleman took out his 
watch. 

(d) Verbs compounded ivith forth. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The citizens went forth to welcome home the re- 
turning exile. 2. The water gushed forth from the rock. 
3. The volcano sends forth flame and smoke. 

(e) Verbs compounded ivith in. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The farmers have gathered in their wheat. 2. The 



130 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

commander called in the pickets. 3. The claimants sent 
in their accounts. 4. The well has caved in. 

(f ) Verbs compounded with over. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The stream was bridged over with ice. 2. The 
money was paid over to the heirs. 3. The man said, 
"Come over and help us." 

(g) Verbs compounded with off. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The workmen were paid off by their employers. 
2. The goods were carried off by the thieves. 3. James 
took off his shoes. 

Section 11. 

Examples in which verbs in the active voice, followed by a 
preposition, may be parsed apart from the preposition as 
intransitive; but when the same idea is expressed by the 
passive form of the verb, the verb and the preposition must 
be taken together as forming a compound verb, 

(a) Upon. 

I. James trod upon (a) my toes. 2. My toes were 
trodden upon by James (&). 3. Some one has written 
upon the wall. 4. The wall has been written upon by 
some one. 

5. Our troops made a charge upon the enemy. 6. The 
enemy were charged upon by our troops. 7. Mary plays 
upon the harp. 8. The harp is played upon by Mary. 

9. The speaker dwelt upon that subject. 10. That 
subject was dwelt upon by the speaker. 

II. He hit upon an ingenious expedient. 12. An 
ingenious expedient was hit upon by him. 



PABSIXG OF VERBS. 131 

13. We look upon him as a learned man. 14. He is 
looked upon by us as a learned man. 

(a) Trod is a verb ; irreg., intrans., etc. 

Upon is a preposition. 

(6) Were trodden upon is a compound verb; irreg., trans., 
pass., etc., and agrees with its subj. toes. — Eule IX. 

Upon is an adverb, qualifying ivere trodden. — Eule XII. 

Remark. — If the preposition of a compound verb in the passive 
voice is taken separately, it must always be parsed as an adverb. 

(b) With. 

1. We can dispense with your assistance. 2. Your 
assistance can be dispensed with. 

3. Do not meddle with things that do not concern you. 
4. Things that do not concern you should not be meddled 
with. 

5. They complied with the conditions. 6. The condi- 
tions were complied with. 

(c) Against. 

1. They guarded against the evil. 2. The evil was 
guarded against by them. 

3. The conspirators plotted against the government. 
4. The government was plotted against by the conspira- 
tors. 

5. The carriage struck against a post, 6. A post was 
struck against by the carriage. 

7. He speaks against his neighbors. 8. His neighbors 
are spoken against by him. 

(d) About. 

1. They talked about that matter. 2. That matter 
was talked about by them. 



132 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

3. He told about the occurrence. 4. The occurrence 
was told about by him. 

5. They made much ado about nothing. 6. Much 
ado was made by them about nothing. 

(e) Of. 

1. They heard of the accident. 2. The accident was 
heard of by them. 

3. He thought of his friends. 4. His friends were 
thought of by him. 

(f) At. 

I. The dog barked at the thieves. 2. The thieves 
were barked at by the dog. 

3. The hunter shot at the wolf. 4. The wolf was 
shot at by the hunter. 

5. The authorities winked at these irregularities. 6. 
These irregularities were winked at by the authorities. 

7. They pointed the finger of scorn at him. 8. The 
finger of scorn was pointed at him by them. 

9. She looked at the goods. 10. The goods were 
looked at by her. 

II. The infidel scoffs at religion. 12. Religion is 
scoffed at by the infidel. 

(g) For. 

1. The sick man sent for a physician. 2. A physician 
was sent for by the sick man. 

3. James has atoned for his fault. 4. James's fault 
has been atoned for by him. 

5. Kind friends cared for the sick soldier. 6. The 
sick soldier was cared for by kind friends. 

7. I have paid for the land. 8. The land has been 
paid for by me. 



PARSING OF VERBS. 133 

(h) TO. 

1. The audience listened to the speaker. 2. The 
speaker was listened to by the audience. 

3. John will attend to the business. 4. The business 
will be attended to by John. 

5. They spoke to me about the matter. 6. I w T as 
spoken to by them about the matter. 

7. James will look to that business. 8. That business 
will be looked to by James. 

Section 12, 

Verbs having two or more nominatives. 

(a) Verbs having two or more nominatives connected by 
AND, and not signifying the same thing. 

1. Both or all the nominatives singular. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Time and tide wait for no man (a). 

(a) Wait is a verb ; reg., intrans., indie, pres., 3d, plu., agreeing 
with its two singular subjects time and tide taken in connection. — 
Kule IX, Note 1. 

2. True rhetoric and sound logic are nearly allied. 

3. Aggression and injury in no case justify retalia- 
tion. 

4. The soil and sovereignty were purchased of the 
natives. 

5. The boldness, variety, and freedom of blank verse 
are infinitely more favorable to sublimity than rhyme. 

6. With rational beings, nature and reason are the 
same thing. 



134 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

7. The verb and the noun make complete sense, 
whereas the participle and the noun do not [ ]. 

8. Humility and knowledge with poor apparel, excel 
pride and ignorance under costly attire. 

9. There are a good and a bad, a right and a wrong, 
in taste, as in other things. 

10. Out of the same mouth proceed blessing and 
cursing. 

11. To be wise in our own eyes, to be wise in the 
eyes of the opinion of the world, and to be wise in the 
sight of our Creator, are three things so different as 
rarely to coincide. — Blair. 

12. Together lay, in a shroud of blood, 
The coward and the brave. 

13. Sincerity and truth form the basis of every virtue. 

14. Luxury, pride, and vanity have frequently as 
much influence in corrupting the sentiments of the great, 
as ignorance, bigotry, and prejudice have in misleading 
the opinions of the multitude. 

15. Title and ancestry render a good man more illus- 
trious, but an ill one more contemptible. 

16. Heaven and earth will witness, 

If Rome must fall, that we are innocent. 

17. One voice, one mind, inspire the throng. 

18. Our good and evil proceed from ourselves. 

19. Day and night yield us contrary blessings, and, 
at the same time, assist each other, by giving fresh luster 
to the delights of both. — Melmoth. 

20. Religion and virtue confer on the mind principles 
of noble independence. — Blair. 



PAUSING OF VERBS. 135 

21. Vanity and vexation flew away for a season. — 
Home. 

22. Care and disquietude came not near my dwelling. — 
Id. 

23. Food and rest were not preferred to the pleasant 
employment. — Id. 

24. Piety and virtue heighten the powers of human 
fruition. — Blair. 

25. Her [Queen Elizabeth's] vigor, her constancy, her 
magnanimity, her penetration, vigilance, and address are 
allowed to merit the highest praise. — Hume. 

26. Wit and judgment are seldom united. — Karnes. 

27. Memory and wit are not often conjoined. — Karnes. 

28. The boast of heraldry, the pomp of power, 

And all that beauty, all that wealth e'er gave, 
Await alike the inevitable hour. — Grav. 

29. The conqueror and his captive, the monarch and 
his subject, the lord and his vassal, the philosopher and 
the unlettered hind, shall find their distinctions to have 
been mere illusions. — Blair. 

2. Both or all the subjects plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. His [the sinner's] hopes and fears all hang upon 
the world (a). 

(a) Hang is a verb; irreg., intrans., indie, pres., 3d, plu., agree- 
ing with its subjects hopes and fears taken conjointly. — Rule IX, 
Note 1. 

2. Disappointments and distresses are often blessings 
in disguise. 

3. Eiches and pleasures are the chief incentives to 
criminal deeds. 



136 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

4. His passions and habits render him [the sinner] an 
absolute dependent on the world. — Blair. 

5. In the breastplate of Aaron were placed the myste- 
rious Urim and Thummim. 

Note. — Urim and Thummim are Hebrew nouns of the plural 
number. 

3. The subjects partly singular and partly plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Formidable sounds and furious declamation, confi- 
dent assertions and lofty periods, may affect the young 
and inexperienced (a). — Sir Robert Walpole. 

(a) May affect is a verb; reg., trans., poten., pres., 3d, plu., 
agreeing with its subjects sounds, declamation, assertions, and peri- 
ods.— Rule IX, Note 1. 

2. The desolate aspect of things without, deserted 
streets, the drear howling of the wind, the incessant 
pattering of the rain, contributed to cast a gloom over 
my mind. — Warren. 

3. The corrupted temper and guilty passions of the 
bad, frustrate the effect of every advantage which the 
world confers on them. — Blair. 

4. Thou art gone to the grave, but we will not deplore 

thee, 
Though sorrows and darkness encompass the tomb. — 
Heber. 

(b) Verbs having two or more nominatives in the singular 
connected by and, and signifying the same thing. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. This philosopher and poet was banished from his 
country (a). 



PARSING OF VERBS. 137 

(a) Was banished is a verb; reg., trans., pass, voice, iridic., 
1st past, 3d, agreeing with its subjects philosopher and poet in the 
singular, because the subjects are singular, and, though taken to- 
gether, signify the same person. — Rule IX, [Note 2. 

2. Such a Savior and Redeemer is actually provided. 

3. Let us declare what great things our God and 
Savior has done for us. 

4. Immediately comes a hue and cry after the thieves. 

5. Flesh and blood hath not revealed it to thee. 

6. James Beattie, a philosopher and poet, was born in 
Scotland in 1735. 

(c) Verbs having two or more singular nominatives taken 
separately. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Either James or John will come (a). 

2. Neither James nor John will come. 

3. No law, no restraint, no regulation is required to 
keep him in bounds. 

4. Every plant and every flower 
Shows forth God's almighty power. 

5. Early, then, may you learn that it is not on the 
external condition in which you find yourself placed, 
but on the part which you are to act, that your welfare 
or unhappiness, your honor or infamy depends. — Blair. 

6. Each day and each hour brings its portion of duty. 

7. A noun or pronoun joined with a participle consti- 
tutes the nominative absolute. 

8. Wisdom or folly governs us. 

9. Man's happiness or misery is, in a great measure, 
put into his own hands. 

P. M.— 12. 



138 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

10. When sickness, infirmity, or reverse of fortune 
affects us, the sincerity of friendship is tried. — Blair. 

11. Has not sloth, or pride, or ill temper misled you 
from the path of sound and wise conduct? — Blair. 

12. To have secured, even to a poor Indian, a spot on 
which to lay his aching head, [or] to have given him but 
a cup of cold water in charity, will be a greater treasure 
than to have been the conqueror of kingdoms. — Sprague. 

13. Neither human wisdom nor human virtue, unsup- 
ported by religion, is equal to the trying situations which 
often occur in life. — Blair. 

14. Every good and every perfect gift is from above. — 
Blair. 

15. The philosopher, the saint, or the hero, the wise, 
the good, or the great man, often lies hid and concealed 
in a plebeian. — Addison. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(<x) Will come is a verb, etc. It is in the singular number, 
because its two singular subjects, James and John, are taken sepa- 
rately.— Kule IX, Note 3. 

(d) When a verb preceded by two or more nominatives, 
taken separately, refers to one of the nominatives, and not 
to the others. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Wisdom, not wealth, procures esteem (a). 

2. Prudence, and not pomp, is the basis of his fame. 

3. Not fear, but labor, began to overcome him. 

4. Her talents, and not her beauty, attract attention. 

5. Her beauty, and not her talents, attracts attention. 

6. Pride, not nature, craves much. 



PARSING OF VERBS. 139 

7. Veracity, as well as justice, is to be our rule of 
life. 

8. There is order, as well as connection, in the suc- 
cession of our ideas. 

9. Reputation, beauty, riches, grandeur, nay, even 
royalty itself, would many a time have been gladly 
exchanged by the possessors for that more quiet and 
humble station with which you are now dissatisfied. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Procures is a verb, etc. It is 3d, sing., to agree with its 
subject wisdom. — Rule IX, Note 4. 

Wealth is a noun, etc., and is the subject of 'procures under- 
stood. 

(e) Nominatives of different persons connected by and. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Thou and he should perform your duty (a). 

2. You and James must go to school. 

3. He and I have recited our lessons. 

4. You and I have kind parents to provide for our 
wants. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Should perform is a verb, etc. It is of the second per- 
son, because its nominative thou is of the second person, while the 
other nominative he is of the third person — Rule IX, Note 5 ; and 
it is of the plural number, because its subjects thou and he are con- 
nected by and. — Rule IX, Note 5. 

(f ) Nominatives of different persons connected by or or 

NOR. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. You or I am mistaken (a). 

2. Thou or thy friends are to make reparation. 



140 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Am is a verb, etc. It is of the first person, to agree with the 
nominative I which stands next to it — Eule IX, Note 6 ; and it is 
singular, because its subject I is singular. — Rule IX. 

You is a pronoun, etc., and subj. of are understood. — Rule VIII. 

(g) Two or more singular nominatives connected by and, 
and requiring a singular verb. 

OTHERWISE. 

Sentences with subjects compound in form, but singular in 
construction. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. To hope and to strive is the way to thrive (a). 

2. Yonder lives a great scholar and divine. 

3. Early [(&)] to bed, and early to rise, 
Makes a man healthy, and wealthy, and wise. 

4. Lay not up for yourselves treasures on earth where 
moth and rust doth corrupt. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) To liope is a verb, etc. ; pres., inf. It has the construction 
of a noun, etc. ; sing., nom., and is the partial subject of the verb 
is. 

To strive is a verb, etc. (Parse after the model of to hope.) 

To hope and to strive is equivalent to a noun ; neut., 3d; 
sing., nom., and subj. of is. — Eule VIII. 

Is is a verb, etc., agreeing in the singular with its subject to hope 
and to strive. 

(6) Read " Early [to go] to bed," etc. 



ADVERBS. 141 



ARTICLE XV. 



ADVERBS. 
Section 1. 

Adverbs of time. 
(a) Adverbs of time present. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Fervid on the glittering tide, 

Now the noontide radiance glows (a). — Cunningham. 

2. Be wise to-day, 'tis madness to defer. — Young. 

3. Doth my father yet live ? 

4. Our brethren are already in the field. 

5. Still where rosy pleasure leads, 
See a kindred grief pursue. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Now is an adverb of time present, qualifying the verb 
gloivs. — Rule XII. 

(b) Adverbs of time past. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. James has just arrived (a). 2. I have lately been 
in the city. 3. The house has been recently repaired. 
4. I saw your brother yesterday. 

5. She had formerly resided in Philadelphia. 6. Eome 
was anciently governed by kings. 7. I once had a pet 
hen. 8. I have heretofore had dealings with that man. 



142 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

9. I have hitherto refrained from saying any thing in 
regard to this matter. 

10. It has been a long time since I have heard from 
my friend. 

11. My brother returned yesterday from the city. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Just is an adverb of time past, qualifying the verb has 
arrived. — Eule XII. 

(c) Adverbs of time future. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I will set out immediately (a). 2. I will go forth- 
with. 3. I will come presently. 4. Take this letter 
straightway to the post-office. 

5. Obey me instantly. 6. I will go with you directly. 
7. I will go to-morrow. 8. I will show thee the things 
that shall be hereafter. 

9. Let us henceforward endeavor to do our duty. 10. 
The Lord will preserve, us henceforth. 11. I will go 
by and by. 12. He will come soon. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Immediately is an adverb of time future, and qualifies 
the verb will set out. — Eule XII. 

(d) Adverbs of time relative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. When (a) my father and mother forsake me, then 
(b) the Lord will take me up. 



ADVERBS. 143 

2. First go and be reconciled to thy brother, and then 
come and offer thy gift at the altar. 

3. I reached the station just as the train was start- 
ing. 

4. That event occurred before I was born. 

5. After the men had eaten their dinner, they returned 
to their labor. 

6. Meanwhile the inhabitants were preparing to repel 
the threatened invasion. 

7. We remained in the house till the rain was over. 

8. Susan rose early. 

9. Thomas went late to school. 

10. I will give you assistance whenever you need it. 

11. I met him afterward. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) and (b) When and then are adverbs of time relative, when 
qualifying forsake, and then qualifying will take up. — Rule XII. 

(e) Adverbs of time absolute. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. God has always (a) existed, and will always con- 
tinue to exist. 

2. He will ever be mindful of his covenant. 

3. Do you never receive intelligence from your son ? 

4. The smoke of their torment ascendeth up forever 
and ever. 

5. Earth loses thy pattern forever and aye; 
O sailor boy, sailor boy, peace to thy soul ! 



144 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Always is an adverb of time absolute, qualifying the verb 
has existed. — Rule XII. 

(f ) Adverbs of time repeated. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Men often (a) mistake their true interests. 

2. We are frequently disappointed in our expecta- 
tions. 

3. We are sometimes deceived by appearances. 

4. He occasionally drinks a glass of wine. 

5. We seldom find any one who is satisfied with his 
present attainments and possessions. 

6. The eagle is a bird which is rarely met with. 

7. In some states the governor is elected yearly. 

8. The Gazette is published daily. 

9. I have visited Baltimore once, Philadelphia twice, 
and New York thrice. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Often is an adverb of time repeated, and qualifies the verb 
mistake. — Rule XII. 

(g) Adverbs denoting the order of time. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. In Roman history we have, first (a), an account of 
the arrival of JEneas and his companions in Italy. 

2. We have, secondly, an account of the successors of 
iEneas, down to the time of the founding of Rome by 
Romulus and Remus. 



ADVERBS. 145 

3. We have, thirdly, an account of the Roman kings, 
from the death of Romulus to the expulsion of the Tar- 
quins. 

4. We have, fourthly, an account of the Republic, 
from the time of its establishment by Brutus and his col- 
leagues, till the period of its overthrow by the usurpation 
of Julius Caesar. 

5. We have, fifthly, an account of the Empire, from 
the time of its establishment by Augustus, to the period 
of its final extinction on the occasion of the capture of 
Constantinople by the Turks. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) First is an adverb denoting the order of time, and qualifying 
the verb have. — Kule XII. 



Section 2. 

Adverbs of place. 
(a) Adverbs denoting the place in which. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Here (a) rests his head upon the lap of earth, 

A youth to fortune and to fame unknown. — Gray. 

2. Wheresoever the carcass is, there shall the eagles be 
gathered together. 

3. Bat yonder comes the powerful king of day, 
Rejoicing in the east 

4. What she could not find anywhere, she believed to 
be nowhere. 

5. My sleeping room is above. 

6. My office is below. 

M. R— 13. 



146 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 



MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Here is an adverb denoting the place in ivhich, and qualifies 
the verb rests. — Rule XII. 



(b) Adverbs denoting the place to which. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Hither (a), ye faithful, haste with songs of triumph. 
2. Whither shall I fly? 

3. Why did the sons of Jacob go down into Egypt? 
They went thither to purchase corn. 

4. They turned their faces homeward. 5. The column 
leans outward. 6. The wall fell inward. 7. The smoke 
curled upward. 

8. The meteor shot downward. 9. The pendulum 
moves backward and forward. 10. The passengers went 
aboard. 11. The sailors came ashore. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Hitlter is an adverb denoting the place to ivhich, and qualifies 
the verb come understood. — Rule XII. 

(c) Adverbs denoting the place from which. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Arise, let us go hence (a). 

2. Having visited Washington, we went thence to 
Baltimore. 

3. Whence arises the misery of this present world ? 

4. The man of contemplation walks forth in the 
evening. 

5. The traveler turned aside to view a cascade. 



ADVERBS. 147 

6. The slave ran away from his master. 

7. A sheep wandered off from the flock. 

8. Isaac went out in the evening to meditate in the 
fields. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Hence is an adverb denoting the place from ivhich, and qual- 
ifies the verb go. — Kule XII. 

Section 3. 

Adverbs of degree. 

EXAMPLES. 

I. He is much (a) elated by his success. 2. James is 
more studious than John. 3. Charles is the most studi- 
ous boy in school. 

4. Henry is little inclined to study. 5. George is less 
inclined to study than Henry. 6. William is the least 
inclined to study of any boy in school. 

7. The "weather is very warm. 8. The weather is too 
warm to be pleasant. 9. These peaches are almost ripe. 
10. Those pears are quite ripe. 

II. The tea is too weak. 12. This coffee is strong 
enough. 13. You are just the man that I wished to 
see. 14. James is just six years old. 

15. The condition of things w^as even worse than [ ] 
had been represented. 16. Henry is but ten years old. 

17. The night is so dark that I can not see to walk. 

18. William is as tall as I am. 19. Mary is fast 
asleep. 20. Susan is wide awake. 21. You are alto- 
gether mistaken. 



148 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. * 

22. He rode all unarmed, and he rode all alone. 23. 
The goods were partly consumed by the fire. 24. The 
moon was partially eclipsed. 

25. The sun is exceedingly hot. 26. The weather is 
extremely cold. 27. The nights are moderately cool. 
28. This fruit is slightly acid. 

29. The patient is somewhat better. 30. He is en- 
tirely free from pain. 31. His case is utterly hopeless. 
32. They employed themselves wholly in domestic affairs. 

33. The heart of man is desperately wicked. 34. His 
sufferings were intolerably severe. 35. Her joy was un- 
speakably great. 36. The inhabitants of heaven are in- 
effably happy. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Much is an adverb of degree, qualifying the participle 
elated. — Rule XII. 

Section 4. 

Adverbs of affirmation, 

EXAMPLES. 

1. What you have heard is indeed (a) true. 2. Ver- 
ily, the way of the transgressor is hard. 3. Surely you 
are mistaken. 

4. You are certainly deceived. 5. Charles will un- 
doubtedly fulfill his promise. 6. That proposition is 
unquestionably true. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Indeed is an adverb of affirmation, and qualifies the verb 
^.—Rule XII. 



ADVERBS. 149 

Section 5. 

Adverbs of negation. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The story is not (a) true. 2. There is no longer 
any room for hope. 3. They are noway alarmed. 

4. The mystery can nohow be solved. 5. The book 
can nowhere be found. 6. Charity never faileth. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Not is an adverb of negation, qualifying the verb is — 
Kule XII. 

Section 6. 
Adverbs of doubt or uncertainty, 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Perhaps (a) he is mistaken. 

2. Possibly he may be able to accomplish his under- 
taking. 

3. Perchance there may be some error in the calcula- 
tion. 

4. Peradventure the woman will not be willing to fol- 
low me unto this land. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Perhaps is an adverb of doubt, qualifying the verb is. — 
Eule XII. 

Section 7. 

Adverbs of manner. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Plato, thou reasonest well (a). — Addison. 

2. I would not willingly think ill of a neighbor. 



150 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

3. If a man judges amiss in the supreme point, judging 
right in all else he but aggravates his folly. — Young. 

4. How do you like your new home? 

5. None can be properly called rich who have not 
more than they want. 

6. True liberty can exist only when justice is equally 
administered to all. — Lord Mansfield. 

7. That which we call alternately the morning and the 
evening star is a planetary world. — Addison. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Well is an adverb of manner, qualifying the verb reason- 
est— Eule XII. 

Section 8. 

Infinitives performing the office of adverbs in modifying 
verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

I. He came to do the work (a). 2. He went to see 
the show. 3. He has gone to visit his parents. 4. A 
messenger was sent to convey the intelligence. 

5. The money was used to purchase food. 6. The 
medicine was given to ease the pain. 7. Salt is put on 
meat to preserve it. 

8. Food is cooked to render it more digestible. 9. 
Victuals are seasoned to improve the taste. 10. Agents 
were employed to sell the book. 

II. I will lend you some money to accommodate you. 
12. God made the sun to rule the day, and the moon to 
give light by night. 

13. The nurse gave the child a rattle to please it. 14. 



ADVERBS. 151 

He gave all his goods to feed the poor. 15. The apples 
were left to rot in the orchard. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) To do is a verb, etc., and performs the office of an adverb 
in modifying the verb came. — Eule XII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Supply an ellipsis and read thus : " He came [for this purpose, 
namely] to do the work ; " and parse to do as a noun in apposition 
with purpose understood. — Rule I. 



Section 9. 

Infinitives performing the office of adverbs in qualifying 
adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. They are eager to hear (a) the news. 2. He is 
anxious to learn the fate of his friend. 3. They are 
careful to avoid giving offense. 

4. They were curious to discover the secret. 5. He is 
too lazy to work. 6. He is too weak to labor. 7. The 
fruit is too sour to be pleasant. 

8. The problem is difficult to solve. 9. The question 
is easy to answer. 10. This fruit is good to eat. 11. 
Man is prone to do evil. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) To liear is a verb in the infinitive mode, etc. It is here 
used as an adverb to qualify the adjective eager. — Rule XII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Read thus : " He is eager [for this thing, namely] to hear the 
news ; " and parse to hear as a verb in the infinitive mode, etc., used 
as a noun in apposition with thing understood. — Rule I. 



152 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 10. 

Infinitives performing the office of adverbs in qualifying 
adverbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The work was done too badly to last (a). 2. He 
proceeded too cautiously to be entrapped. 

3. The fox ran too fast to be caught by the dogs. 4. 
The tree was rooted too deeply to be overturned by the 
wind. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) To last is a verb, etc.; infinitive, and performs the office 
of an adverb in qualifying the adverb badly. — Kule XII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Supply an ellipsis and read thus : " The work was done too badly 
[for this purpose, namely] to last ; " and parse to last as a verb, in- 
finitive, etc., used as a noun, etc., obj., and in apposition with purpose 
understood. — Rule I. 



ARTICLE XVI. 



THE PREPOSITIONS. 
Section 1. 

Examples embracing all the prepositions in common use. 

1. James is in the house. 2. Henry went into the 
house. 3. Peter went toward the house. 4. Samuel 
went to the house. 



THE PREPOSITIONS. 153 

5. Thomas came out of the house. 6. David came 
from the house. 7. Thomas Avent round the house. 8. 
The dog passed through the house. 

9. The cat crept under the house. 10. The bird flew 
over the house. 11. The yard is before the house. 12. 
The garden is behind the house. 

13. A tree stands near the house. 14. A ladder leans 
against the house. 15. A traveler sat by the well. 16. 
His home is beyond the sea. 

17. A willow grew beside the stream. 18. The man 
was beside himself. 19. The ship lies at the wharf. 20. 
The sailor stood on the deck. 

21. The president took upon himself the responsibility. 
22. The boy fell off the horse. 23. A plank lay across 
the brook. 24. A meteor shot athwart the sky. 

25. The horse ran along the road. 26. The men 
marched up the hill. 27. The boat went down the river. 
28. Adown the glen rode armed men. 

29. The shepherd lay beneath a spreading beach-tree. 
30. The ground is underneath our feet. 31. Goat Island 
is above the cataract. 

32. The suspension bridge is below the falls. 33. Italy 
lies beyond the Alps. 34. The Falls of Niagara are be- 
tween Lake Erie and Lake Ontario. 

35. The cottage stood betwixt two elms. 36. There is 
many a slip Hwixt the cup and the lip. 37. The lily 
grew among the thorns. 

38. The tares grew amongst the wheat. 39. The trav- 
eler stood amidst the ruins of Palmyra. 40. A lark 
reared her brood amid the corn. 

41. The meadow was enameled with flowers. 42. We 
should live within our means. 43. I reside without the 
corporation. 44. Parents provide for their children. 



154 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

45. They arrived after nightfall. 46. They departed 
before sunrise. 47. They remained till evening. 48. I 
have not seen Thomas since Monday. 

49. James has gone about his business. 50. All but 
James were present. 51. All besides James were absent. 
52. The rider sat astride the horse. 

53. The vessel lay inside the harbor. 54. The ship 
was anchored outside the harbor. 55. The boat lay along- 
side the ship. 

56. Our faithful Nile 
Flowed ere the wonted season. 

57. Mont Blanc is covered with snow throughout the 
year. 58. The sick man was past all help. 59. Do ye 
unto others as ye would that they should do unto you. 

60. What is the price of wheat ? 61. Wheat is worth 
one dollar per bushel. 62. The case of Wilson versus 
Jones will be tried at the next term of the court. 

63. The merchant went to New York via Baltimore 
and Philadelphia. 64. All on board were lost, except 
one of the sailors. 

65. Save his own good broadsword, he weapon had 
none. 66. We reside in the country during the summer. 
67. Concerning these things they are ignorant. 

68. He said nothing respecting the object of his jour- 
ney. 69. The boys have gone a-fishing. 70. These two 
animals fell into a dispute as to which had the greatest 
power of endurance. 71. As for me, give me liberty or 
give me death. 

Section 2. 

Double prepositions. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. My house stands over against the Capitol. 

2. The sand slid from under my feet. 



THE PREPOSITIONS. 155 

3. And from before the luster of her face, 
White break the clouds away. — Thomson. 

4. He calls for famine, and the meager fiend 
Blows mildew from between his shriveled lips. — Id. 

5. [They shall] sever the wicked from among the just. 
— Matt xiii: 49. 

6. And there was a rainbow round about the throne, 
in sight like unto an emerald. — Rev. iv : 3. 



Section 3. 

How to determine what ivords are connected by a prepo- 
sition. 

Rule. — Form a question by placing the preposition before the 
interrogative what; the answer to this question will be the latter 
of the words connected by the preposition. Then form another 
question by placing the interrogative what before the phrase con- 
sisting of the preposition and its object ; the answer to this question 
will be the former of the words connected by the preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. They were driven from their homes into the wil- 
derness. 

Question. From what were they driven ? 

Answer, They were driven from their homes. 

Homes is therefore the latter of the words which the preposi- 
tion from connects. 

Q. What from their homes? 

A. They were driven from their homes. 

Were driven is therefore the former of the words which the 
preposition from connects. 



156 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

Q. Into what? 

A. Into the wilderness. 

Wilderness is therefore the latter of the words connected by 
the preposition into. 

Q. What into the wilderness? 

A. They were driven into the wilderness. 

Were driven is therefore the former of the words connected 
by the preposition into. 

2. I gazed on these things with astonishment. 

Question. On what ? 

Answer. On these things. 

Q. What on these things? 

A. I gazed on these things. 

Q. With what? 

A. With astonishment. 

Q. What with astonishment? 

A. I gazed with astonishment. 

From the foregoing answers, we infer that on connects things 
with gazed, and that with connects astonishment with gazed. 

Section 4 

The words connected by the prepositions occurring in the 
following sentences are indicated by repeating at the end of 
each sentence the words thus connected, and by placing the 
connecting preposition between them. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. This amazing fall of water is made by the river 
Niagara, in its passage from Lake Erie into Lake On- 
tario. 

Fall of water. Is made by the river. Is made in its passage. Its 
passage from Lake Erie. Its passage into Lake Ontario. 



THE PREPOSITIONS. 157 

2. He defended himself against the attack with great 
lira very. 

He defended AGAINST the attack. He defended with bravery. 

3. The criminal was brought upon his trial before the 
judge. 

Was brought upox his trial. Was brought before the judge. 

4. His word has decided all causes in Sicily for these 
three years. 

Has decided ix Sicily. Has decided for these three years. 

5. On their return, vast numbers of geese are killed 
by the sportsmen in the northern, western, and southern 
waters. 

Are hilled ox their return. Are killed by the sportsmen. Are killed 
IN the waters. 

6. Of all the subterraneous caverns now known, the 
Grotto of Antiparos is the most remarkable, as well for 
its extent as for the beauty of its sparry incrustations. 

The Grotto of Antiparos. Is the most remarkable of the caverns. 
Most remarkable for its extent. Jlost remarkable for the beauty. The 
beauty of its incrustations. 

7. This celebrated cavern was first explored by one 
Magni, about one hundred years ago, at Antiparos. 

Was explored by Magni. Was explored about one hundred years 
ii go. Was explored AT Antiparos. 

8. To thy voice nations have listened. 
Have listened to thy voice. 

9. The traitor sold his country for gold. 
Sold for gold. 

10. The country was sold for gold by the traitor. 

Was sold for gold. Was sold by the traitor. 



158 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

11. He threw the stone over the wall. 
Threw over the wall. 

12. The stone was thrown over the wall by him. 
Was thrown over the wall. Was thrown by him. 

13. From the creatures of God let man learn wisdom. 
Learn from the creatures. The creatures OF God. 

14. At the close of the day, when the hamlet is still, 

And mortals the sweets of forgetfulness prove, 
When naught but the torrent is heard on the hill, 
And naught but the nightingale's song in the 
grove ; 
'T was thus by the cave of a mountain afar, 

While his harp rung symphonious, a hermit 
began ; 
No more with himself or with Nature at war, 
He thought as a sage, though he felt as a man. 

Began at the close. The close of the day. Began by the cave. 
The cave of a mountain. Naught but the torrent. Is heard on the 
hill. Naught but the song. Is heard in the grove. Being at war. 
War with himself. War with Nature. 

15. Of man's first disobedience, and the fruit 
Of that forbidden tree, whose mortal taste 
Brought death into the world, and all our woe, 
With loss of Eden, sing, heavenly muse. 

Sing of disobedience. Sing of the fruit. The fruit of that tree. 
Brought into the world, Brought with loss. Loss of Eden. 

16. Night, sable goddess, from her ebon throne, 
In rayless majesty now stretches forth 
Her leaden scepter o'er a slumbering w^orld. 

Stretches forth from her throne, Stretches forth in majesty. Stretches 
forth o'er a slumbering world. 



THE PREPOSITIOXS. 159 

Section 5. 

The antecedent and subsequent terms of relation. 

Remark. — The former of the words between which a preposition 
shows the relation is called the antecedent term of relation, and the 
latter is called the subsequent term of relation. 

(a) A noun as the antecedent term of relation. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Sunday is the first day of (a) the week (b). 2. Did 
you ever see the man in the moon ? 3. Pope's Essay on 
Man is a fine poem. 

4. Man has dominion over the inferior animals. 5. 
The priests suppressed a smile at the stranger's sim- 
plicity. 

6. A good boy is a credit to his friends. 7. Peruvian 
bark is a remedy for the ague. 

8. A soul without reflection, like a pile 
Without inhabitant, to ruin runs. 

9. Against the prisoner at the bar I can not have the 
slightest prejudice. 

10. I discovered one in the habit of a shepherd, with 
a musical instrument in his hand. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Of is a preposition, and shows the relation of its subsequent 
iveek to its antecedent day. 

(b) Week is a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by the preposition 
of.— Rule IV. 

(b) A verb as the antecedent term of relation. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A stately tree grew on the plain. 2. We had 



160 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

walked about four miles. 3. We came to a little hill. 
4. We had not proceeded above fifty paces. 

5. We passed through a forest. 6. We went toward 
the village. 7. We were shocked at the inhuman deed. 
8. The king sat upon his throne. 

9. The horses were stabled beside the altar. 10. A 
proclamation was issued by the president. 11. The 
shepherd lay stretched beneath a willow. 

12. The horse jumped over the fence. 13. The crim- 
inal was arraigned before the judge. 14. The servant 
walked behind his master. 

15. The boat ran against a snag. 16. The traveler 
fell among thieves. 17. The hermit dwelt in a cave. 

Suggestion. — In the examples of the present and also of the 
following sub-sections, let the pupil be required to point out, 1st. 
The preposition ; 2d. The subsequent term of relation ; and, 3d. The 
antecedent term of relation. Thus, in example 17, the pupil will 
first read the example, and then say : 

In is a preposition, showing the relation between dwelt and cave. 

The noun cave is the subsequent term of relation ; and 

The verb lived is the antecedent term of relation. 

(c) A participle as the antecedent term of relation. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The fragrance of the flower is passing away in its 
own odor. 

2. I will never stand exposed to the artifices of 
courts. 

3. Placed on the verge of youth, my mind 
Life's opening scenes surveyed. 

4. The horses dashed madly forward, beast and rider 
blinded and stifled by the gushing rain, and gasping for 
breath. 



THE PREPOSITIONS. 161 

5. A river is a large stream of water flowing through 
the land. 

6. A city is a large town incorporated with special 
privileges. 

(d) An adjective as the antecedent term of relation. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Be diligent in your business. 2. Be not anxious 
for your life. 3. The mother is uneasy about her absent 
child. 4. The king is legally incapable of doing wrong. 

5. The father was angry with his son. 6. The citizens 
were indignant at the outrage which had been com- 
mitted. 7. The female world w r ere busy among them- 
selves. 

(e) An adverb as the antecedent term of relation. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Henry w r as lying apart from his brother. 2. He 
acted conformably to his instructions. 3. He came 
agreeably to his promise. 

4. Micipsa left to Jugurtha, conjointly with Hiempsal 
and myself, the administration of the kingdom of Nu- 
midia. — Trans, from Sallust. 

(f ) Two or more subsequent terms connected by the same 
preposition to the same antecedent term. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. True gentleness stands opposed to harshness and 
severity, to pride and arrogance, to violence and op- 
pression. 

2. ' ' Entertainment for man and beast." 

P. M.— 14. 



162 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

3. The suit of Wilson versus Carey and Jones. 

4. I went to New York by the way of Pittsburgh and 
Philadelphia. 

5. Over the mountain and the moor, I wander hungry 
and weary. 

(g) Tivo or more subsequent terms connected by two or 
more prepositions ivith the same antecedent term. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The lady left the twins with me in the manse. 

2. On New-year's night an old man stood at his win- 
dow. 



ARTICLE XVII. 



THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
Section 1. 

Conjunctions used to connect nouns and pronouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Idleness and ignorance are the parents of vice and 
misery (a). 2. Both wealth and poverty are temptations 
(6). 3. A gulf or bay is a portion of the sea extending 
into the land. 

4. Either Henry or George will go. 5. Neither Mary 
nor Susan is at home. 6. Nor riches I nor power 
possess. 



THE CONJUNCTIONS. 163 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) And is a copulative conjunction, connecting the nouns idle- 
ness and ignorance. — Kule XIII. 

(b) Both and and are corresponding copulative conjunctions, 
serving conjointly to connect wealth and poverty. — Kule XIII. 

Section 2. 

Conjunctions connecting adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Washington was a great and good man. 2. I am 
both cold and hungry. 

3. Never use language that is either profane or ob- 
scene. 4. This water is neither hot nor cold. 

Section 3. 

Conjunctions connecting verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. James reads and writes. 2. Susan both knits and 
sews. 

3. The enemy will be obliged either to fight or to run. 
4. I neither saw nor heard any thing. 

Section 4. 

Conjunctions connecting adverbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He speaks correctly and fluently. 2. He writes 
both rapidly and elegantly. 

3. He expresses himself neither wittily nor wisely. 
4. You must act in this matter either now or never. 



164 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 5. 

Conjunctions connecting phrases, 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Over the mountain and over the moor, 
Hungry and weary, I wander forlorn. 

2. Tumultuous horror brooded o'er the van, 
Presaging wrath to Poland and to man. 

3. It will fall, if fall it must, amid the proudest mon- 
uments of its glory, and on the very spot of its origin. 

4. We are called upon to cherish, with high venera- 
tion and [with] grateful recollections, the memory of our 
fathers. 

5. Both the ties of nature and the dictates of policy 
demand this. 

6. Most of them were men of distinguished families, 
[ ] of powerful talents, [ ] of great learning, [ ] of pre- 
eminent wisdom, [ ] of decision of character, and of in- 
flexible integrity. 

Section 6. 

Conjunctions connecting sentences. 

FOR EXAMPLES SEE SECTION 8. 



Section 7. 



Classes of Conjunctions. 

(a) Copulative Conjunctions. 

List : And, as, both, because, even, for, if, that, 
then, since, seeing, so, moreover. 



THE CONJUNCTIONS. 165 

Examples of their use. 

1. Ye shall be as gods. 2. Both the father and the 
son lost their lives. 3. The mighty God, even the Lord, 
hath spoken. 4. For every one that asketh receiveth. 
5. I know that my Kedeemer liveth. 6. If all this be 
so (adv.), then (conj.) man has a natural freedom. — 
Locke. 

(b) Disjunctive Conjunctions. 

List : Or, nor, either, neither, than, though, although, 
yet, but, except, whether, lest, unless, notwithstanding. 

Examples of their use. 

1. Now abideth faith, hope, charity, these three ; but 
the greatest of these is charity. 2. Except ye repent, 
ye shall all likewise perish. 3. Let him that thinketh 
he standeth, take heed lest he fall. 4. We can not 
thrive unless we are industrious and frugal. 5. Truth 
is sometimes stranger than fiction. 

(c) Corresponsive (or Correlative) Conjunctions. 

List: Both— and ; if — then; either — or; neither — 
nor ; whether — or ; though, or although — yet. 

Examples of their use. 

1. I will both (a) lay me down in peace, and (a) [ 
sleep. 2. I will either go to your house, or you shall 
come to mine. 3. I will neither go to your house, nor 
shall you come to mine. 4. I do not know whether the 
report is true or not. 5. Though he slay me, yet will 
I trust in him. 

(a) Both and and are correlative conjunctions (that is, they are 
conjunctions which relate mutually, the one to the other), and, 
taken together, they connect the clause I will sleep with the clause 
/ will lay me down in pea^-e. 



166 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

(d) Conjunctive Adverbs. 

List : When, while, as, before, after, ere, till, until, 
since, where. 

Examples of their use. 

1. When (a) it goeth well with the righteous, the city 
rejoiceth. 2. We should make hay while the sun shines. 

3. We reached the station just as the train w 7 as leaving. 

4. You should look before (b) you leap. 5. The noble- 
man saith unto him, Come down, sir, and see my son 
ere he die. 6. The man locked the door after the horse 
had been stolen. 7. We will remain in the house till 
the storm abates. 8. The ship did not leave the harbor 
till after the storm had subsided. 9. It has been nearly 
four hundred years since America was discovered. 

Note. — A conjunctive adverb connects a dependent with a 
principal clause, and qualifies a verb in each clause. It is 
equivalent to two adverbial phrases, the one containing a relative 
pronoun, and the other its antecedent. 

When is = at the time -\- at which ; while is = during the time 
+ in which ; as is — at the time + at which ; after + [ ] is — 
after the time -f- at which ; before + [ ] is = before the time + at 
which ; ere + [ ] is = ere the time + at which ; till + [ ] is = till 
the time + at which ; since + [ ] is = since the time + at which. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) When is a conjunctive adverb ; as a conjunction, it con- 
nects the dependent clause, it goeth well with the righteous, with the 
leading clause, the city rejoiceth, and as a representative of the two 
adverbial phrases, at the time and at which, it qualifies the two 
verbs rejoiceth and goeth. 

(b) In this sentence, instead of parsing before as a conjunctive 
adverb, it may be parsed as a preposition governing the clause 
you leap as a noun in the objective case. 

Eemark. — Each of the words before, after, ere, till, until, and 
since, before a dependent clause, may be parsed either as a con- 
junctive adverb, or as a preposition governing the clause, as a 
noun in the objective case. 



THE CONJUNCTIONS. 167 

Section 8. 

Promiscuous sentences exemplifying the use of the conjunc- 
tions. 

1. If any one were learning to play on the flute for 
public exhibition, what hours and days would he spend 
in giving facility to his fingers, and [in] attaining the 
power of the sweetest and most impressive execution. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

What hours and (a) days would he spend in giving 
facility to his fingers, and (b) in attaining the power of 
the sweetest and (c) most impressive execution, if (d) 
any one were learning to play on the flute for public 
exhibition. 

(a) And is a conjunction, connecting the nouns hours and days. 

(b) And is a conjunction, connecting the phrase in attaining the 
power of the sweetest and most impressive execution with the phrase in 
giving facility to his fingers. 

(c) And is a conjunction, connecting the adjectives sweetest and 
most impressive. 

(d) If is a conjunction, connecting the two simple clauses of 
which the sentence consists. 

2. If he were devoting himself to the organ, what 
months and years would he labor that he might know 
its compass, and be master of its keys, and be able to 
draw out at pleasure all its various combinations of har- 
monious sounds, and its full richness and delicacy of ex- 
pression. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

What months and (a) years would he labor that (6) he 
might know its compass, and (c) be master of its keys, 
and (d) be able to draw out at pleasure all its various 
combinations of harmonious sounds, and (e) its full 



168 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

richness and (J) delicacy of expression, if (g) he were 
devoting himself to the organ. 

(a) And is a conjunction, connecting the nouns months and 
years. 

(b) That is a conjunction, connecting the three dependent clauses 
he might know its compass, he might be master of its keys, and he might 
be able to draw out at pleasure all its various combinations of harmonious 
sounds, and its full richness and delicacy of expression, with the leading- 
clause ivhat months and years ivould he labor. 

(c) And is a conjunction, connecting the clause he might be 
master of its keys with the preceding clause he might know its com- 
pass. 

(d) And is a conjunction, connecting the clause he might draw 
out at pleasure all its various combinations of harmonious sounds, and 
its full richness and delicacy of expression, with the preceding clause 
he might be master of its keys. 

(e) And is a conjunction, connecting the phrase its full richness 
and delicacy of expression with the phrase all its various combinations 
of harmonious sounds. 

(/) And is a conjunction, connecting the nouns richness and 
delicacy. 

(g) If is a conjunction, connecting the simple dependent clause 
he were devoting himself to the organ, with the complex leading clause 
which commences with what and ends with expression. 

3. When I shall be found, in my place here in the 
senate or elsewhere, to sneer at public merit because it 
happened to spring up beyond the little limits of my own 
state or neighborhood ; when I refuse for any such cause, 
or for any cause, the homage due to American talent, to 
elevated patriotism, to sincere devotion to liberty and the 
country; or if I see an uncommon endowment of heaven, 
if I see extraordinary virtue and capacity in any son of 
the south, and if, moved by local prejudice, or gangrened 
by state jealousy, I get up to abate the tithe of a hair 
from his just character and just fame, may my tongue 
cleave to the roof of my mouth. 



THE CONJUNCTIONS. 169 

NATURAL ORDER. 

May my tongue cleave to the roof of my mouth ivhen 

(a) I shall be found, in my place here in the senate or 

(b) elsewhere, to sneer at public merit because (c) it hap- 
pened to spring up beyond the little limits of my own 
state or (d) neighborhood ; when (e) I refuse for any 
such cause, or (J) for any cause, the homage due to 
American talent, [and'] ((/) to elevated patriotism, [and] 
(A) to sincere devotion to liberty and (i) [to] the country; 
or (k) if (/) I see an uncommon endowment of heaven, 
[or] (m) if (?i) I see extraordinary virtue and (o) capacity 
in any son of the south, and (p) if (q), moved by local 
prejudice, or (r) gangrened by state jealousy, I get up to 
abate the tithe of a hair from his just character and (s) 
just fame. 

(a) Wlien is a conjunctive adverb. As a conjunction, it con- 
nects the clause I shall be found, etc., with the clause may my tongue, 
etc. ; and, as an adverb, it qualifies the verbs shall be found and may 
cleave. 

(b) Or is a conjunction, connecting the adverb elsewhere with the 
adverbial phrase in, my place hem in the senate. 

(c) Because is a conjunction, connecting the clause it happened 
to spring up, etc.. with the clause I shall be found, etc. 

(d) Or is a conjunction, connecting the nouns state and neighbor- 
hood. 

(e) Wlien is a conjunctive adverb, connecting the clause I re- 
fuse, etc., with the clause may my tongue, etc., and qualifying the 
verbs refuse and may cleave. 

(/) Or is a conjunction, connecting the phrase /or any cause with 
the phrase for any such cause. 

(g) And understood connects the phrase to elevated patriotism 
with the phrase to American talent. 

(h) And understood connects the phrase to sincere devotion to lib- 
erty and the country with the phrase to elevated patriotism. 
M. P.— 15. 



170 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

(i) Asici connects the phrase to the country with the phrase to 
liberty. 

(k) Of connects the clause if I see an uncommon endowment of 
heaven in any son of the south, with the clause when I refuse, etc. 

(I) If is a conjunction, connecting i" see an uncommon endowment 
of heaven in any son of the south, and if, moved by prejudice, or gan- 
grened by state jealousy, I get up to abate the tithe of a hair from his 
just character and just fame, with may my tongue, etc. 

(m) Or connects if I see extraordinary virtue, etc., with if I see 
an uncommon endowment, etc. 

(n) If connects I see extraordinary virtue and capacity in any son 
of the south, and if, moved, etc., with may my tongue, etc. 

(o) And connects the nouns capacity and virtue. 

(p) And. connects if, moved by local prejudice, etc., with if I see 
extraordinary virtue, etc. 

(q) If connects moved by local prejudice, etc., with may my tongue, 
etc. 

(r) Or connects state jealousy with local prejudice, 

(s) And connects just fame with just character. 



ARTICLE XVIII. 



THE NOMINATIVE CASE INDEPENDENT, 

Section 1. 

Tfw nominative case independent by way of address. 

EXAMPLES, 

1. James, bring your book (a). 2. Mary, you may 
recite your lesson. 3, Children, obey your parents, 



THE NOMINATIVE CASE INDEPENDENT. 171 

4. O Solitude, where are the charms 

That sages have seen in thy face? — Cowper. 

5. When all thy mercies, O my God, 

My rising soul surveys, 
Transported with the view, I'm lost 
In wonder, love, and praise. — Addison. 

6. How shocking must thy summons be, O Death, 
To him who is at ease in his possessions ! 

7. Father of all, in every age, 

In every clime, adored, 
By saint, by savage, and by sage, 
Jehovah, Jove, or Lord ! (6) — Pope. 

MODELS FOK PARSING. 

(a) James is a noun, etc., in nom. case independent by way of 
address. — Kule V, Note 1. 

(6) Father is a noun, etc., in the nom. case independent by way 
of address. — Kule V. 

Jehovah. Jove, and Lord are in the nom. case independent 
after the passive participle adored. — Rule X. 

Section 2. 

TJie nominative case independent by way of address. 

additional examples. 
1. Eve Lamenting the Loss of Paeadise. 

Must I leave thee, Paradise? thus leave 
Thee, native soil, those happy walks and shades, 
Pit haunt for gods ? where I had hoped to spend 
Quiet, though sad, the respite of that day 
That must be fatal to us both. O flowers ! 
That never will in other climate grow ; 



172 THE PARSERS MANUAL, 

My early visitation, and my last 
At even ; which I had bred with tender hand, 
From the first opening bud, and gave ye names : 
Who now shall rear you to the sun, or rank 
Your tribes, or water from the ambrosial fount? 

Thee lastly, nuptial bower ! by me adorned 
With what to sight or smell was sweet; from thee 
How shall I part, and whither wander down 
Into a lower world, to this obscure 
And wild? How shall we breathe in other air 
Less pure, accustomed to immortal fruits? — Milton. 



2. A Morning Hymn. 

These are thy glorious works, Parent of good ! 

Almighty, thine this universal frame ; 

Thus wondrous fair, thyself how wondrous then ! 

Unspeakable who sitt'st above the heavens, 

To us invisible, or dimly seen 

In these thy lower works ; yet these declare 

Thy goodness beyond thought and power divine. 

Speak ye who best can tell ; ye sons of light, 

Angels ; for ye behold him, and with song 

And choral symphonies, day without night, 

Circle his throne rejoicing. Ye in heaven; 

On earth, join all ye creatures to extol 

Him first, Him last, Him midst, Him without end. 

Fairest of stars, last in the train of night, 
If better thou belong not to the dawn, 
Sure pledge of day, that crown'st the smiling morn 
With thy bright circlet, praise him in thy sphere. — 
Milton. 



THE NOMINATIVE CASE INDEPENDENT. 173 

Section 3. 

The nominative case independent by way of exclamation. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. O the depth of the wisdom and knowledge of God! 
(a). 

2. O the grave ! the grave ! it hides every error. 

3. Can gold gain friendship ? Impudence of hope ! — 
Young. 

4. Does he take warning and reform ? Alas ! not he, 
incorrigible epicure ! 

5. Silence, how dead ! and darkness, how profound ! 

6. A present deity ! they shout around ; 

A present deity ! the vaulted roofs rebound. — Dry- 
den. 

7. Farewell, a long farew T ell to all my greatness! — 
Shalcspeare. 

8. O wretched prince ! O cruel reverse of fortune ! 

9. What a figure ! 

10. But the horrors of such a grave ! so frightful and 
dishonored ! 

11. "A singular novelty," muttered the knight; "to 
advance to storm such a castle without pennon or ban- 
ner displayed ! " — Scott. 

12. What a dreadful sight ! 

13. But the grave of those we loved, what a place for 
meditation ! 

14. O liberty ! O sound once delightful to every Ro- 
man ear ! O sacred privilege of Roman citizenship ! 
once sacred, now trampled upon! — Cicero. 

15. Poor little shivering child ! I pitied her, 



174 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Depth is a noun, etc., in the nom. case independent by way 
of exclamation. — Eule V, Note 2. 

Section 4. 

The nominative case independent by way of pleonasm. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. My banks, they are furnished with bees (a). 

2. Thy rod and thy staff, they comfort me. 

3. He that formed the eye, shall he not see ? He that 
formed the ear, shall he not hear ? 

4. He that hath ears let him hear. 

5. Now Ben he loved a pretty maid, 
Her name was Nelly Gray. 

6. The wind-flower and the violet, 
They perished long ago. 

7. The night it was gloomy, the wind it was high. 

8. The fathers ! where are they ? 

9. The little sprouting oak-tree, 
Two leaves it had at first. 

10. The boy that saw the acorn fall, 
He feeble grew and gray. 

11. Well have they done their office, those bright 
hours. 

12. The employment he held in Asia Minor and 
Pamphylia, what did it produce but the ruin of those 
countries ? 

13. Custom, fashion, popular favor; these are the 
things that fill his entire vision and decide every ques- 
tion of opinion and duty. 



THE NOMINATIVE CASE INDEPENDENT, 175 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Banks is in the nominative case independent by way of 
pleonasm. 

Section 5. 

The nominative case independent by ivay of inscription. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Brown's Grammar (a). 2. Webster's Dictionary. 
3. Heed's Shoe Store. 4. The Tallmadge House. 5. 
Arsenic [written as a label]. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Grammar is in the nominative case independent by way 
of inscription. — Eule V, Note 4. 

Section 6. 

The nominative case independent in connection with par- 
ticiples and infinitives; otherwise called, the nominative case 
absolute. 

(a) The nominative case absolute before participles. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Shame being lost, all virtue is lost (a). 

(a) Shame is a noun, etc., in the nom. case absolute, being- 
placed before the participle being lost, and being independent of the 
rest of the sentence. — Eule V, Note 5. 

2. Our candles being now all lighted, and the whole 
place being completely illuminated, never could the eye 
be presented with a more magnificent spectacle. 

3. But [he being] watch-worn and weary, his cares 
flew away. 



176 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

4. All obstacles having been overcome, the work 
prospered. 

5. Light after light sliding through the gloom, the 
whole hemisphere was brilliantly bespangled. 

6. Soldier rest, thy warfare [being] o'er, 
Sleep the sleep that knows not breaking. 

7. The fame of Flor Silin's benevolence having reached 
other villages, the famished inhabitants presented them- 
selves before him. 

8. [He] turning his head, his eye glanced rapidly over 
the universe; the sun [being] far sunk behind him, the 
moon [being] under his feet, the earth [being] spread out 
in prospect before him, and the whole firmament glitter- 
ing with constellations above. 

9. At midnight, in his guarded tent, 

The Turk was dreaming of the hour 
When Greece, her knee in suppliance [being] bent, 
Should tremble at his power. 

10. There art thou like a satiate conqueror 
Recumbent on the murmuring deep, thy smiles 

[being] 
All unrepentant of the savage wreck. 

11. The spars, [being] formed into trees and shrubs, 
presented a kind of petrified grove; some [being] white, 
some [being] green, and all receding in due perspective. 

12. And now her wealth and finery [(a)] fled, 

Her hangers-on [(a)] cut short all, 
Her doctors found, when she was dead, 
Her last disorder mortal. — Goldsmith. 

(a) Supply "being." 

13. They see here a real divinity; her altars rising on 
every hand throughout these happy states ; her glories [ 



THE NOMINATIVE CASE INDEPENDENT. 177 

chanted by three millions of tongues ; and the whole 
region smiling under her blessed influence. — Patrick 
Henry. 

14. I have seen a good old father, his locks [ ] white 
as snow, his steps [ ] slow and trembling, beg his only 
son to quit the lurking place of the worm. 

15. The lessons [ ] over, writing began. 

16. [ ] Having nothing within himself whence to 
draw enjoyment, his [the sinner's] only resource is in 
things without. — Blair. 

17. Commerce having thus got into the legislature, 
privilege must be done away. — Lord Mansfield. 

18. After some time this paroxysm ceasing, we again 
stood up in order to prosecute our voyage to Euphemia, 
which lay within sight. — Goldsmith. 

(b) The nominative case absolute after a participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I w T as not aware of the young man's being your 
son (a). . 

2. I had not heard of your having been appointed 
collector. 

3. Your being a parent involves the duty of providing 
for your children. 

4. The keeping of bad company was the cause of his 
becoming a drunkard. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Son is a noun, etc., in the nom. case absolute after the par- 
ticiple being. — Rule V, Note 5. 



178 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

(c) The nominative case absolute after an infinitive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. To be a teacher involves great responsibility (a). 

2. To become a good scholar requires much labor. 

3. He is ambitious to become an orator. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Teaclaer is a noun, etc., in the nom. case absolute after the 
infinitive to be. 



ARTICLE XIX, 



APPOSITION. 
Section 1. 

The apposition of a noun with a noun, 

EXAMPLES. 

1. John the Baptist was beheaded (a). 

2. Peter the Hermit preached the first crusade. 

3. Prince Albert was the husband of Queen Victoria. 

4. In the fifth century, the Franks, a people of Ger- 
many, invaded Gaul. 

5. Jerusalem, the Jewish capital, was destroyed by the 
Romans under Titus, the son of the emperor Vespasian. 

6. And there was with us a young man, a Hebrew, 
the captain of the guard. 



APPOSITION. 179 

7. In the days of Joram, king of Israel, flourished 
the prophet Elisha. 

8. Sisera fled and took refuge in the tent of Jael, a 
woman of the Kennite tribe, the descendant of Hobel. 

9. Him, Tubal named, the Vulcan of old times, 

The sword and falchion their inventor claim (b). — 
Milton. 

10. All now is vanished, Virtue sole survives, 
Immortal, never-failing friend of man, 
His guide to happiness on high. 

11. From brightening fields of ether fair disclosed, 
Child of the sun, effulgent Summer comes. — Thom- 
son. 

12. I thank God [(c)] that I have a more permanent 
and steady rule for my conduct, than the dictates of my 
own conscience. — Lord Mansfield. 

13. Such destruction to withstand, 

He hastened to oppose the rocky orb 

Of tenfold adamant, his ample shield. — Milton. 

14. O Solitude, romantic maid! — Grainger. 

15. Every one must remember young Emmett, the 
Irish patriot. 

16. She [Queen Elizabeth] guarded not herself with 
equal care or equal success from less infirmities : the 
rivalship of beauty, the desire of admiration, the jeal- 
ousy of love, and the sallies of anger. — Hume. 

17. Hail beauteous stranger (d) of the grove, 

Thou messenger of Spring ! 
Now heaven repairs thy rural seat, 
And woods thy w T elcome sing. — Logan. 

18. Come, peace of mind, delightful guest, 
Return and make thy downy nest 
Once more in this sad heart. — Cowper. 



180 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

19. Fathers, it is known to you that King Micipsa, 
my father, on his death-bed left in charge of Jugurtha, 
his adopted son, conjointly with my unfortunate brother 
Hiempsal and myself, the administration of the kingdom 
of Numidia. — Trans, from Sallust. 

20. This house belongs to Thomas White, Esq. (e). 

21. That land is the property of George Brown, junior. 

22. Why, then, the noble lord can think that I am 
ambitious of present popularity, that echo of folly and 
shadow of renown, I am at a loss to determine. — Lord 
Mansfield. 

23. Dionysius, the tyrant of Sicily, was far from 
being happy, though he possessed great riches, and all 
the pleasures which wealth and power could procure. — 
Trans, from Cicero. 

24. Damocles, one of his flatterers, [ ] deceived by 
these specious appearances of happiness, took occasion 
to compliment him on the extent of his power, his 
treasures, and royal magnificence, and declared that no 
monarch had ever been greater or happier than Dionys- 
ius. — Id. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Baptist is a noun; prop., 3d, sing., masc, nom., and in 
apposition with John. — Rule I. 

(b) Arrange and read thus: "The sword and falchion claim, [as] 
their inventor, him named Tubal, the Vulcan of old times." 

(c) Supply " for this thing, namely," and parse the clause "that 
I have, etc." as a noun, obj., and in apposition with thing under- 
stood. 

(d) Stranger (the cuckoo) is a noun; com., 2d, sing., poetically 
feminine, and nom. independent by way of address. — Rule V, 
Note 1. 

(e) Esq. is a noun ; com., 3d, sing., masc, obj., and in apposition 
with Thomas White. — Rule I. 



APPOSITION. 181 

Section 2. 

The apposition of a noun with a pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I, John, saw the holy city (a). 

2. We, the subscribers, promise to pay the sums at- 
tached to our several names. 

3. Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of 
thee. 

4. Ye nymphs of Solyma, begin the song. — Pope. 

5. Thou sun with golden beams, 

And [thou] moon with paler rays, 
Ye starry lights, ye twinkling flames, 
Shine to your Maker's praise. — Watts. 

6. In many things we offend all (6). 

7. And can eternity belong to me, 

Poor pensioner on the bounties of an hour? — 
Young. 

8. Putting his moral habits out of the question, it is 
a charming piece of bird romance, this building a pleas- 
ure house in the midst of the w T ild bush, hanging it with 
native tapestry, and paving it with precious stones. 

9. A professed Catholic, he imprisoned the pope (c). 

10. A pretended patriot, he impoverished the country. 

11. The jailor of the press, he affected the patronage 
of letters. 

12. The proscriber of books, he patronized philosophy. 

13. The persecutor of authors and the murderer of 
printers, he yet pretended to the protection of learn- 
ing. —Phillips. 



182 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

14. The assassin of Palm, the silencer of De Stael, and 
the denouncer of Kotzebue, he was the friend of David, 
and the benefactor of De Lille, 

15. A royalist, a republican ; a Catholic and a patron 
of the synagogue; a subaltern and a sovereign ; a Christian 
and an infidel, he was, through all his vicissitudes, the 
same stern, impatient, and inflexible original. — Phillips. 

16. For he, deep-judging sage, beheld 

With pain the triumphs of the field. — Whitehead. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) John is a noun, etc., in apposition with the pronoun L — 
Kule I. 

(b) All is a noun, etc., nom., and in apposition with ive. — 
Eule I. 

(c) Catholic is a noun, etc., nom., and in apposition with he. — 
Eule I. 

Section 3. 

The apposition of a pronoun with a noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Mary herself will go (a). 

2. The parties themselves can adjust the difficulty. 

3. The sun himself shall die. 

4. The book is a present from my cousin, him that 
keeps the book-store. 

5. I am going to visit my friends in the country, them 
that we met in the street. 

6. The dress was made by Catharine the milliner, her 
that we saw in the shop. 

7. Dennis the gardener, he that gave me the tulips, 
has promised me a piony (&). 



APPOSITION. 183 



MODELS FOR PARSING. 



(a) Herself is a pronoun, etc., agreeing with its antecedent 
Mary. — Eule VI. Herself is nom., and in apposition with Mary. — 
Eule I. 

(6) Gardener is a noun, etc., nom., and in apposition with 
Dennis. — Eule I. 

He is a pronoun, etc., agreeing with its antecedent Dennis — 
Eule VI ; and is in apposition with Dennis. — Eule I. 



Section 4. 

The apposition of a pronoun with a pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I myself will come (a). 2. Thou thyself art in 
fault. 3. He did it himself. 

4. "We can manage the business ourselves. 5. You 
yourselves were the aggressors. 6. They themselves 
were to blame. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Myself is a compound personal pronoun, etc. ; nom. case, 
and in apposition with I. — Eule I. 

Section 5. 

Two or more nouns or pronouns in the singular put in 
apposition ivith a noun or pronoun in the plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I saw your brothers Thomas and Henry (a). 

2. Captains Clarke and Henderson were wounded in 
the late battle. 



184 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

3. The instruments of cruelty, the stake, the rack, the 
knout, and the lash, would no longer lacerate and torture 
the wretched culprit (6). 

4. The internal qualities, power, discernment, wit, 
mildness, sympathy, courage, benevolence, excite pleasant 
emotions. The opposite qualities, dullness, peevishness, 
inhumanity, cowardice, occasion painful emotions. 

5. Together round her grave we played, 
My brother John and I. 

6. Sisters and brothers, little maid, 
How many may you be? 

7. Two of us in the church -yard lie, 

My sister and my brother. — Wordsworth. 

8. Nature, as if [ ] desirous that so bright a produc- 
tion of her skill should be set in the fairest light, had 
bestowed on him [King Alfred] all bodily accomplish- 
ments : vigor of limbs, dignity of shape and air, and a 
pleasant, engaging, and open countenance. — Hume. 

9. She gave him her table book, in which she had just 
written three sentences on seeing her husband's dead 
body ; one in Greek, another in Latin, and a third in 
English. — Hume. 

10. For hot, cold, moist, and dry, four champions fierce, 
Strive here for mastery. — Milton. 



MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Thomas and Henry are nouns,, etc.; nom. and in appo- 
sition with brothers. — Rule I. 

(b) The stake, the fi'ack, the Imout, and the lash are 
nouns, etc., in the singular; nom., and in apposition with instru- 
ments. — Rule I. 



APPOSITION. 185 

Section 6. 

A noun in the plural put in apposition ivith hco or more 
nouns either singular or plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Silence and Darkness, solemn sisters, twins 

From ancient Night, who nurse the tender thought, 
That column of true dignity in man, 
Assist me (a). — Young. 

2. Shall I less enjoy heaven and earth, or thought and 
action, or man's more material luxuries of food and sleep, 
the common and cheap desires of all ? — Bulwer. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Sisters and twins are nouns, etc. ; plu., nom., and in ap- 
position with the two singular nouns Silence and Darkness. — 
Kule I. 

Column is a noun, etc. ; nom., and in apposition with thought. — 
Kule I. 

Section 7. 

Tivo or more nouns in the plural put in apposition with 
another noun in the plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Various paraphernalia of a lady's toilet lay scattered 
about: pins, brooches, curling papers, ribbons, gloves, 
etc. (a). 

2. The various animals of the farm-yard, horses, cows, 
and sheep, live peaceably together. 

3. The reading-room was supplied with various peri- 
odicals : quarterlies, monthlies, weeklies, and dailies. 

P. M.— 16. 



186 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

4. All woven fabrics, woolens, silks, and cotton goods, 
are at present very dear. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Pins, nrooclies, curling papers, ribbons, gloves, 
etc., are nouns, etc., in the plural, noni., and in apposition with 
the plural noun paraphernalia. — Rule I. 

Section 8. 

A distributive term in the singular put in apposition ivith 
a plural noun or pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. They speak vanity every one with his neighbor (a). 
2. Go ye every one unto his own city. 3. We have 
turned every one to his own way. 

4. They went out one by one. 5. The whole party, 
man by man, entered the opening. 6. Grudge ye not 
one against another. 7. Be ye helpers one of another. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Every one is a distributive pronoun, in the singular num- 
ber, and in apposition witli the plural pronoun they. — Rule I. 

Section 9. 

A phrase used as a noun in apposition ivith a noun or 
pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. It is mean to lie (a). 

2. It is criminal to steal. 

3. It is impossible for me to perform the work. 



APPOSITION. 187 

4. Behold how good and how pleasant it is for breth- 
ren to dwell together in unity. 

5. It is my living sentiment, and, by the blessing of 
God, it shall be my dying sentiment : Independence now, 
and independence forever (b). — Webster. 

6. Delightful task! (c) to rear the tender thought, 
To teach the young idea how to shoot, 

And pour the fresh instruction o'er the mind (d). — 
Thomson. 

7. I have appeared unto thee for this purpose, to 
make thee a minister and a witness, both of these things 
which thou hast seen, and of those things in the which I 
will appear unto thee. — Acts. 

8. It is a rule, then, which we should, upon all occa- 
sions, both private and public, most religiously observe : 
"To be inexorable to our own failings, while we treat 
the rest of the world with tenderness, not excepting 
even such as forgive none but themselves." — Mehnoth's 
Pliny. 

9. It is wrong to hate our enemies. 

10. It is glorious to die for one's country. 

11. What is it to die? 

12. It is difficult to decide on the comparative merit 
of Fox and Pitt. — Butler. 

13. It is in vain, sir, to extenuate the matter. — Patrick 
Henry. 

14. It is of little use to form plans of life. — Johnson. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 
(a) Kead thus : " It, namely, to lie, is mean." 

It is a pronoun, etc. ; nom., and is the subject of is. — Eule 
VIII. 



188 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

To lie is a verb, etc. It is equivalent to a noun, 3d, sing., 
neut., nom., and put in apposition with it. — Kule I. 

(b) The phrase " Inclepeifideoce now, astcl indepen- 
dence Ibi'eveF* 9 is equivalent to a noun, etc.; nom., and in 
apposition with it. 

(c) Tasfc is a noun, etc. ; nom. independent by way of exclama- 
tion.— Kule V, Note 2. 

(d) To rear the tender thought, etc., is equivalent to a 
noun, etc. ; nom. independent, because it is in apposition with task, 
which is in that case. — Kule I. 



Section 10<, 

An infinitive phrase as a norm in apposition ivith a noun 
understood. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. If there be any yet alive, they are shut up in dun- 
geons, [(«)] there to drag out (b) a life more intolerable 
than death itself. — Trans, from Salhist. 

2. Those who came [ ] to scoff remained [ ] to pray. 

3. He sighed for his country, by twilight repairing [ 
To wander alone by the wind-beaten hill. — Camp- 
bell, 



4. He is gone [ ] to visit his friends. 



MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Supply " for this purpose, namely." 

(b) To drag out is a reg. compound verb; inf., etc., and is 
used as a noun, etc.; obj., and in apposition with purpose under- 
stood. — Kule I. 

[For other examples see Article XXIII, 36,] 



APPOSITION. 189 

Section 11. 

Sentences in apposition ivith nouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A murmur of happiness rose from his breast: 

" O God thou hast blessed me, I ask for no more" (a). 

2. An opinion has long prevailed, not only here at home, 
but likewise in foreign countries, that men of wealth are 
always safe, however clearly convicted. — Cicero. 

3. Political economists teach this principle : " Labor 
is capital." 

4. The exclamation, "I am a Koman citizen!" was 
of no avail to them. — Cicero. 

5. Why should it be thought a thing incredible with 
you, that God should raise the dead? 

6. Tully has very justly exposed a precept delivered 
by some ancient philosophers : That a man should live 
with his enemy in such a manner as might leave him 
room to become his friend ; and with his friend in such 
a manner that, if he become his enemy, it should not be 
in his power to hurt him. — Blair. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) "O Gocl thou hast Messed me, I ash for no 

more," is a compound sentence used as a noun, etc. ; nom., and 
in apposition with murmur. — Rule I. 

Section 12« 

A sentence as a noun in apposition ivith a noun under- 
stood. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He informed us [(a)] that we were too late (6). 

2. We were informed [ ] that we were too late. 



190 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

3. He convinced us [ ] that it was useless. 

4. We were convinced [ ] that it was useless. 

5. I will deliver thee from the people, and from the 
Gentiles, to whom I now send thee [ ] to open their 
eyes, and [ ] to turn them from darkness to light, and 
from the power of Satan to God, [ ] that they may re- 
ceive forgiveness of sins. 

6. I showed to them [ ] that they should repent and 
turn to God, and do works meet for repentance. 

7. I am persuaded [ ] that none of these things are 
hidden from him [King Agrippa]. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Supply " of this fact, namely." 

(b) That we "were too late is a sentence used as a noun; 
obj., and in apposition with fact understood. — Rule I. 

[For other examples see Article XXIII, 36.] 

Section 13. 

Sentences in apposition ivith the pronoun it. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. It is generally believed that he was innocent of the 
crime laid to his charge (a). 

2. It is thought that he will succeed in his under- 
taking. 

3. It is probable that the planets are inhabitable 
worlds. 

4. It was not without some ebullitions of ancient 
fierceness, that the flame which had burned for so many 
generations seemed about to expire. 



APPOSITIOX. 191 

5. It was an observation of the reporters, that it re- 
quired great exertion to follow Mr. Fox while he was 
speaking; that it was easy and delightful to follow Mr. 
Pitt, but that it was not so easy to recollect what had 
delighted them. — Butler. 

6. It may be added that, in all Mr. Fox's speeches 
there was an unquestionable indication of good humor, 
which attracted every heart. — Butler. 

7 '. It became a saying among the Arabs, that a child 
might traverse the country with a gold crown upon his 
head, and not a hand be stretched out to take it. 

8. It is surprising in what countless swarms bees have 
been spread over the far west. — Irving. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) That he was innocent of the crime laid to his 
charge is a sentence used as a noun, etc. ; nom., and in apposition 
with it.— Kule I. 

Section 14. 

A noun in apposition ivith the general idea of a foregoing 
clause or sentence. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He permitted me to consult his library, a kindness 
which I shall not forget (a). 

2. I have offended reputation, a most unnoble swerv- 
i ng. — Shahspeare. 

3. As a proof of his activity, he leaped over a wall. 

4. And what never happened before, a universal tem- 
pest mingled heaven and earth in rain, and lightning, 
and darkness. — Montgomery. 



192 THE PARSERS MANUAL, 

5. All hands are plied, a zealous task. 

6. At the time of her marriage she was only about 
eighteen years of age, and her husband was also very 
young ; a season of life very unequal to oppose the in- 
terested views of artful and designing men. — Hume. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Mindness is a noun, etc. ; nom., and in apposition with 
the general idea of the clause he permitted me to consult his library. — 
Eule I. 

Section 15. 

A noun or pronoun in apposition with a noun or pronoun 
by repetition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. They have forsaken me, the fountain of living 
waters, and have hewn out for themselves cisterns, 
broken cisterns (a), which can hold no water. 

2. I find the total of their hopes and fears, 
Dreams, empty dreams. 

3. I like that ring, that ancient ring. 

4. O Lord, our Lord, how excellent is thy name in all 
the earth ! 

5. " What are we," said the musing prince, "that we 
should fill the earth with ourselves, we kings ? " 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Cisterns is a noun, etc. ; obj., and in apposition with the 
preceding noun cisterns by repetition. — Eule I. 



APPOSITIOX. 193 

Section 16. 

The conjunction as as a sign of apposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He acted as deputy sheriff (a). 

2. He was elected as president of the society. 

3. He was employed as an assistant in the school. 

4. He [man] received his Creator's benediction as lord 
of this new world. — Blair. 

5. True charity is a disposition residing in the heart, 
as a fountain whence all the virtues of benignity, candor, 
forbearance, generosity, compassion, liberality &g\y as so 
many native streams. — Blair. 

6. All who have been distinguished as servants of God, 
or benefactors of men, have been eminent for fortitude 
of mind. — BloAr. 

7. Separated from the dregs of the human mass, they 
shall be permitted to mingle with prophets, patriarchs, 
and apostles ; with all those great and illustrious spirits 
who have, in former ages, shone as the servants of God 
and the benefactors of men. — Blair. 

8. Addison, as a writer of prose, is highly esteemed. 

9. The wise and the good acknowledge him as their 
benefactor. 

10* What the ignorant natives had been terrified at as 
a giant, was nothing more than a sparry concretion. 

11. Promote, then, as objects of primary importance, 
institutions for the general diffusion of knowledge. 

12. I shall treat him as a calumniator and a villain. 

13. Franklin was great both as a statesman and as a 
philosopher. 

P. M.— 17. 



194 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

14. Damon, Pythias, condescend to admit me as a 
third friend in a union so perfect. — Fenelon. 

15. This was my employment as a philosopher. 

16. I am set up as a spectacle to all mankind of the 
uncertainty of human affairs. 

17. Cowper's fame as a poet is equaled by his excel- 
lence as a man. 

18. The title of town treasurer is rightly mine, as 
guardian of the best treasure [ ] the town has. — Haw- 
thorne. 

19. Let such as are conscious of frailties and crimes 
consider forgiveness as a duty which they owe to others. — 
Blair. 

20. It is impossible that, as a man, he [King Alfred] 
should be entirely exempt from some small specks and 
blemishes. — Hume. 

21. When we contemplate her [Queen Elizabeth] as a 
woman, we are apt to be struck with the highest admira- 
tion of her qualities and extensive capacity. — Hume. 

22. The true method of estimating her [Queen Eliza- 
beth's] merit, is to lay aside all considerations pertaining 
to her sex, and to consider her merely as a rational being 
in authority, and intrusted with the government of man- 
kind. — Hume. 

23. He [Obidah] saw on his right hand a grove, which 
seemed to wave its shades as a sign of invitation.— Dr. 
Johnson. 

24. Whosoever shall not receive the kingdom of God 
as a little child, shall in no wise enter therein. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Sheriff is a noun, etc. ; nora., and in apposition with he. — 
Rule I. 



APPOSITIOX. 195 

Section 17. 

The conjunction even as a sign of apposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. For there the Lord commanded the blessing, even 
life for evermore (a). — Psalm cxxxiii : 3. 

2. God, even our own God, shall bless us — Psalm 
lxvii : 6. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

a Even is a conjunction, connecting life with Messing. 

Life is a noun, etc. ; objective, and in apposition with blessing. — 
Eule I. 

Section 18. 

The words namely, to wit, videlicet, and scilicet 

used as signs of apposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I have three horses, namely: Jim, Rock, and 
Selim (a). 

(a) Supply an ellipsis and read thus: "I have three horses, 
[designated] namely (=by name) : Jim, Eock, and Selim." Then 
we shall have namely as an adverb qualifying the participle 
designated understood. 

2. I have three horses, to wit: Jim, Eock, andSelira 
(a). 

(a) To wit is the remnant of an ancient form of expression, 
I do you to wit, of which an example occurs in 2 Corinthians viii : 1: 
" Moreover, brethren, we do you to wit of the grace of God be- 
stowed on the churches in Macedonia." Supply the ellipsis and 
read thus: "I have three horses, of whose names, Jim, Eock, and 
Selim, I do you to wit." 



196 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

3. I have three horses, videlicet : Jim, Rock, and 
Selim (a). 

(a) Videlicet, commonly contracted into viz., is a contraction 
of two Latin words, videre licet, meaning to see is permitted. Supply- 
ing the words understood, the sentence will read : " I have three 
horses, whose names, Jim, Rock, and Selim, it is permitted to see." 

4. I have three horses, scilicet : Jim, Rock, and Selim 
(a). 

(a) Scilicet is a contraction of the two Latin words scire licet, 
meaning to know is permitted. Supplying the words understood, the 
sentence will read : " I have three horses, whose names, Jim, Rock, 
and Selim, it is permitted to know." 

Remark. — The actual signification of the words namely, to ivit, 
videlicet, and scilicet may be disregarded, and their office alone be 
taken under consideration. In the respect to the office which they 
perform, they are analogous to as and even in the two preceding 
sections, and therefore indicate that Jim, Rock, and Selim are in 
apposition with horses. 



ARTICLE XX. 



THE SAME CASE AFTER A VERB AS 
BEFORE IT. 

Section 1. 

The nominative case after the verb to be. 

examples. 

1. Contentment is felicity (a). 2. Virtue is the uni- 
versal charm. 3. Talent is something, but tact is every 
thing. 4. Charity is the comforter of the afflicted. 



SAME CASE AFTER AS BEFORE A VERB. 197 

5. Hope is the anchor of the soul. 6. Death is the 
king of terrors. 7. Lord, thou hast been our dwelling- 
place in all generations. 8. I am the Rose of Sharon, 
and the Lily of the valley. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Felicity is a noun, etc., and nom. after is, because it relates 
to the same thing with the subject contentment. — Rule X. 

Section 2. 

The nominative case after other intransitive verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Paul lived a Pharisee (a). 

2. My father became bondsman for a friend. 

3. He went out mate and returned captain. 

4. When I commenced author, my desire was to 
please. 

5. Thou sittest no longer a queen in thy bower, 
But [ ] a widow of sons and of daughters bereft. 

6. The lieutenant fell upon the deck a corpse, the 
victim of a sublime sensibility. 

7. Sweetest of all, the low, tremulous call of the ring- 
dove floated at intervals through the shivering foliage, 
the very soul of melody. 

8. She walks a queen. 

9. He moves a god, resistless in his course. — Pope's 
Horn. Iliad. 

10. He received the intelligence that his w r ife had 
fallen a sacrifice to penury and want. 

11. He sunk into the grave the victim of a broken 
heart. 



198 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

12. He [Napoleon] commenced his course a stranger 
by birth, and a scholar by charity. — Phillips. 

13. In her family, in her court, in her kingdom, she 
[Queen Elizabeth] remained equally mistress. — Hume. 

14. McPherson returned home an altered man. 

15. I pray thee, therefore, let thy servant abide, in- 
stead of the young man, a bondman to my lord. 

16. The summit of the highest [hill which] they could 
before discern seemed but the foot of another, till the 
mountain at length appeared to lose itself in the clouds. — 
Addison. 

17. The Niobe of nations ! there she stands, 
Childless and crownless, in her voiceless woe. — 

Byron. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

She stands there, the Niobe of nations, 
Childless and crownless, in her voiceless woe. 

18. Breath'st thou defiance here and scorn, 
Where I reign king? and, to incense thee more, 
Thy king and lord ! — Milton. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Pliarisee is a noun, etc., and nom. after the intransitive 
verb lived, because it relates to the same person with the subject 
Paul— Bale X. 

Section 3. 
The nominative case after passive verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He was called John (a). 2. She was named Mary. 
3. Jupiter was styled the Thunderer. 4. Cromwell was 
made protector. 



SAME CASE AFTER AS BEFORE A VERB. 199 

5. Washington was appointed commander-in-chief. 

6. The Cardinal De Retz was confined a close prisoner 
in the castle of Valenciennes. 

7. I was reckoned a piece of a wag. 

8. Thou wast born a monster. 

9. An aged man is made the victim of a butcherly 
murder for mere pay. — Webster. 

10. The Earl of Stafford desired that his life might be 
made a sacrifice to obtain reconciliation between the king 
and his people. — Hume. 

11. Others have been given a prey to wild beasts. — 
Sattust. 

12. Both merchants and manufacturers are, with great 
propriety, elected members of the lower house. — Lord 
Mansfield. 

13. I saw a person of very different appearance, [who 
was] named Application. 

14. By universal consent, it [the Niagara Falls] has 
long ago been proclaimed one of the wonders of the 
world. — Greenwood. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Jolin is a noun, etc., and nom. after the passive verb was 
called, because it relates to the same thing with the subject he. — 
Kule X. 

Section 4„ 

The nominative case after a complex copula consisting of 
two intransitive or passive verbs, the first being a finite verb, 
and the second an infinitive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. On nearer approach, it appeared to be a wall of 
Nature's own masonry (a). 



200 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

2. Mr. Adams is to be our teacher. 

3. From what is left on record of Hazael's actions, 
he appears to have proved what the prophet foresaw him 
to be, a man of violence, cruelty, and blood. — Blair. 

4. He appears to have been born a king. 

5. Mr. Jones is known to be an honest man. 

6. You are expected to become a scholar. 

7. He is supposed to be the author of the book. 

8. He is known to be the perpetrator of the crime. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Wall is a noun, etc., and nora. after the complex copula 
appeared to be, because it relates to the same thing with the subject 
it.— Kule X. 

Section 5. 

The participle of an intransitive or passive verb may be 
at the same time both preceded and followed by a nominative 
absolute. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He imagined the rest to be only partakers of his 
felicity, he being the central luminary of his own uni- 
verse. — Montgomery. 

2. The song of the nightingale arose out of the dark- 
ness, and charmed even the stars in their course, [this] 
being the first sound, except the roar of the ocean, that 
they had ever heard. — Id. 

3. Self-knowledge being the last knowledge acquired, 
either in the sky or below it. — Id. 

4. O how I loved that gracious boy ! younger by fif- 
teen years, [he being] brother at once and son. 



SAME CASE AFTER AS BEFORE A VERB. 201 

Section 6, 

The conjunction as is sometimes the sign of the nominative 
after an intransitive or passive verb, corresponding to the 
nominative which precedes the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He acted as governor (a). 2. He was installed as 
president. 3. He was chosen as representative. 4. De- 
mosthenes was distinguished as an orator. 5. Youth can 
not be imputed to any one as a crime. 

6. An artificial courtesy and a studied smoothness of 
manners are too often employed by the artful as a snare, 
and affected by the hard and unfeeling as a cover to the 
baseness of their minds. — Blair. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) Governor is a noun, etc., and nom. after the intransitive 
verb acted, followed by as. — Rule X. 



Section 7 

The objective case after intransitive and passive infinitives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I thought it to be David (a). 2. I knew it to be 
her. 3. They took it to be him. 4. They chose him to 
be captain. 5. We wished him to become a scholar. 
6. They supposed him to be the gardener. 

7. I found out some truths of so much importance to 
mankind that they acknowledge me to have been their 
benefactor. — Lord Lyttleton. 



202 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

8. The laws of the country allow of no place, nor [of] 
any employment, to be a sanctuary for crimes. — Lord 
Mansfield. 

MODEL FOR PARSING. 

(a) David is a noun, etc., and obj. after to 6e, because it relates 
to the same thing with it, which precedes the verb. — Rule X. 



ARTICLE XXL 



THE SAME WORD USED AS DIFFERENT 
PARTS OF SPEECH. 

examples. 

About. 

1. He walks about (adv.). 

2. He walks about (prep.) the room. 

3. A change in the condition of affairs was brought 
about (adv.) 

4. He is about to depart. 

5. The sailors turned the ship about. 

6. Go about your business. 

Round. 

1. The circle is a round (adj.) figure. 

2. Worms of many feet that round (v.) themselves 
into a ball, are bred chiefly under logs of timber. 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 203 

3. I have a daily round (n.) of duties to perform. 

4. Sir Francis Drake sailed round (prep.) the world. 

5. The wheel turns round (adv.). 

KOUND ABOUT. 

1. There was a rainbow round about (comp. prep.) the 
throne. 

2. The spider turned him round about (adv.). 

3. He went by a round-about (adj.) way. 

4. The boy wore a round-about (n.). 

Down. 

1. The sun went down (adv.). 

2. The stone rolled down (prep.) the hill. 

3. Down (n.) is soft feathers, or short hair very fine 
and soft. 

4. He has a down (adj.) look. 

5. Why art thou cast down, O my soul ? 

6. A down is a bank of drifted sand. 

7. The moon is down. 

Up. 

1. The ship sailed up (prep.) the channel. 

2. The prices of goods have gone up (adv.). 

3. There are many ups and downs in the course of a 
man's life. 

Above. 

1. My room is above (adv.). 

2. The waters of the flood rose above (prep.) the tops 
of the mountains. 



204 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

3. Let God regard it from above (n.). 

4. League all your forces, and ye Powers above, 
Your might unite against the might of Jove.— 

Pope's Homer. 

5. Thou shalt not make to thyself the likeness of any 
thing that is in heaven above or in the earth beneath. 

Below. 

1. Standing on the brow of a mountain, I saw a spa- 
cious plain spread out below (adv.). 

2. Louisville is below (prep.) Cincinnati. 

3. The boat came from below (n.). 

Over. 

1. Over (prep.) the mountains and over the moor, 
Hungry and w T eary I wander forlorn. 

2. The property was delivered over (adv.) to the 
rightful owner. 

3. The rain is over (adj.) and gone. 

4. He that gathered much had nothing over. 

5. Come over and help us. 

Under. 

1. Cuba is under (prep.) the dominion of Spain. 

2. The ship went under (adv.) during the storm. 

3. An usher is an under (adj.) teacher. 

High. 

1. Those mountains are very high (adj.). 

2. The heart of the sleeper beats high (adv.). 

3. God is enthroned on high (n.). 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 205 

4. He stands high in my estimation. 

5. The river rose so high as to overflow its banks. 

Low. 

1. On Linden when the sun was low (adj.), 
All bloodless lay the untrodden snow. 

2. Certain birds usually fly low (adv.). 

3. The cattle low (y.) in the farm-yard. 

4. The rich and the poor, the high and the low (?i.), 
have all their own cares and troubles. 

5. The sick man is very low. 

Deep. 

1. The waters of the ocean are deep (adj.). 

2. The sea is called the deep (n.). 

3. The oak struck its roots deep (adv.) into the ground. 

4. He dug the well deep. 

5. The seed was buried too deep. 

6. Plow deep while sluggards sleep, 

And you shall have corn to sell and keep. 

Yonder. 

1. Near yonder (adj.) mountain a bloody battle was 
fought. 

2. But yonder (adv.) comes the powerful king of day. 

But. 

1. Be not faithless, but (coivj.) believing. 

2. He was but (adv.) a fool that brought my answer 
back. 



206 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

3. None but (prep.) the brave deserve the fair. 

4. She said she was alone within the world, 
How could she but (a) be sad? 

(a) Kilt is here equivalent in sense to not, and is therefore an 
adverb qualifying be. 

5. Not but (a) that the place is large. 

(a) The term not tout is equivalent to two negatives that make 
an affirmative, (Goold Brown, p. 666, Obs. 28.) But is there- 
fore, in the present example, an adverb of negation qualifying the 
verb is. 

6. The thing they can't but purpose they postpone 

(a). — Young. 

(a) This sentence is equivalent to " The thing [which] they can 
not not purpose they postpone ;" that is, they postpone the thing 
which they can not avoid purposing. 

7. Who ? d these fardels bear, 
To grunt and sweat under a weary life, 

But (a) that the dread of something after death, — 
The undiscovered country, from whose bourn 
No traveler returns, — puzzles the will, 
And makes us rather bear those ills we have, 
Than fly to others that we know not of? 

(a) Mut is here a substitute for a sentence, and is equivalent to 
"were it not." But, according to etymologists, is compounded of 
the imperative be and the adverb out. Resolving but into its ele- 
ments, the present sentence will therefore read thus : " Who would 
fardels bear, etc., be out [the fact] that the dread of something after 
death makes us rather bear, etc." Be out [the fact] is the same in 
sense as " if it were not for the fact." 

8. The world is full of testimony to prove how much 
depends upon industry : not an eminent author has lived 
but (a) is an example of it. 

(a) In this example supply, after but, "the man who." But has 
here, as in example 7, the sense of be out. The idea is that "be out" 
or " leave out the person who is an example of industry, not an emi- 
nent author has lived." 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 207 

9. I do not know but (a) that I shall need your help. 

(a) Supply ellipses and read thus: "I do not know [any thing 
else] but {■= be out = except) [this thing, namely] that I shall need 
your help." Regarding but as equivalent to except, we may parse 
it as a preposition. That I shall need your help is a substantive clause 
used as a noun ; 3d, sing., neut., obj., and may be considered as being 
either governed directly by the preposition but, or as being in ap- 
position with thing understood. If we resolve but into its compo- 
nents, the noun that I shall need your help must be parsed as being in 
the nom. case, and being the immediate subject of the imperative 
be out, or as being in apposition with thing understood. 



Own. 

1. I own (v.) a horse. 

2. This is my own (adj.) horse. 

3. He came to his ow T n (n.), and his own received him 
not. 

Yet. 

1. I have not yet (adv.) learned my lesson. 

2. Though the Lord be high, yet (cow/,) hath he re- 
spect unto the lowly. 

3. Yet a few days [shall elapse] and thee 
The all-beholding sun shall see no more 

In all his course ; nor yet in the cold ground, 
Nor in the embrace of ocean shall exist 
Thy image. — Bryant. 

4. Yet not to thy eternal resting-place 
Shalt thou retire alone. — Bryant. 

Well. 

1. The well (n.) is twenty feet deep. 2. The work is 
well (adv.) done. 3. I am w T ell (adj.). -i. The water 
began to well (v.) up. 



208 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

As. 

1. She is as (adv.) good as (conj.) he is. 

2. Do as (conj. adv.) we do. 

3. Help such as (ret. pron.) want help. 

4. Will you be so good as to help me ? 

5. He was employed as an assistant. 

6. As I was passing along the street, I met my old 
friend. 

Alone. 

1. I found him alone (adj.). 2. He was sitting 

alone (adv.). 

Still. 

1. My parents are still (adv.) living. 

2. Though he has all that he needs, still (conj.) he is 
not satisfied. 

3. The night was dark and still (adj.). 

4. With his name, mothers still (v.) their babes. 

5. A still (?i.) is a vessel used in the distillation of 
liquors. 

6. Joshua commanded the sun to stand still. 

7. Still where rosy pleasure leads, 
See a kindred grief pursue. 

Since. 

1. That event occurred about two years since (adv.). 

2. Two years have elapsed since (prep.) the occurrence 
of that event. 

3. Since (conj.) we can not recall the past, we should 
make the most that we can of the future. 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 209 

4. Since (eon/.) in each scheme of life I've failed, 
And disappointment seems entailed ; 
Since all on earth [ ] I valued most, 
My guide, my stay, my friend is lost, 
O Solitude, now give me rest, 
And hush the tempest in my breast. — Grainger. 

Then. 

1. First go and be reconciled to thy brother, and then 
(adv.) come and offer thy gift at the altar. 

2. But if there be no resurrection of the dead, then 
(conj.) is Christ not risen. — 1 Cor. xv : 13. 

3. Till then (n.) I will wait for them. 

Else. 

1. Who else (adj.) is coming? 

2. Thou desirest not sacrifice, else (conj. adv.) would 
I give it. 

3. I have nothing else to say. 

4. How else (adv.) may the problem be solved? 

Much. 

1. Much (adj.) time is spent in trifling amusements. 

2. To whom much (n.) is given, of him shall much 
be required. 

3. He was much (adv.) elated by his success. 

4. How much do you owe? 

5. He does much good. 

6. He does much more good than I do. 

7. So much the more is he to be pitied. 

P. M— 18. 



210 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

8. Much pains has been taken to reconcile the parties. 

9. We can not sacrifice too much for our country. 

10. We can not love our country too much. 

11. I have not very much corn. 

12. The medicine helped the patient very much. 

More. 

1. James has more (adj.) money than John [ ]. 

2. Jacob loved Joseph more (adv.) than all his other 
children. 

3. Not more (n.) than others I deserve, 
Yet God has given me more. — Watts. 

4. Sarah is more studious than Anna [ ]. 

5. The more we have, the more we want. 

6. It was nothing more than a sparry concretion [ ]. — 
Goldsmith. 

7. What could he in that impassioned moment have 
said more? — Blair. 

8. Thus with violence shall the great city Babylon be 
thrown down, and shall be found no more at all. 

9. The empire of the Moslem is no more [(a)]. — 
Bidwer. 

(a) Supply "in existence." 

Most. 

1. Most (adj.) persons desire riches. 

2. He is a most (adv.) worthy man. 

3. Most (n.) of the crew were drowned. 

4. You then were thirty years at most, 

And now vou are fourscore. — Hannah More. 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 211 

5. A covetous man makes the most of what he can 
get. 

6. And they all wept sore, and fell on Paul's neck 
and kissed him, sorrowing most of all for the words 
which he spake, that they should see his face no more. 

Few. 

1. I ate dinner with a few {adj.) friends. 2. A few 
(n.) escaped. 3. The days of man are few and full of 
trouble. 

Both. 

1. You must hear both {adj.) sides of the story. 2. 
Both (n.) of my sons were killed in the battle. 3. She 
is both (cor. conj.) beautiful and accomplished. 

All. 

1. All (adj.) the world 's a stage, and all the men and 
women merely players. — Shakspearc. 

2. All (n.), all on earth is shadow, all beyond 
Is substance. 

3. He rode all (adv.) unarmed, and he rode all 
alone. — Scott. 

4. We are all here. 

5. The hills, 
Kock-ribbed and ancient as the sun ; the vales, 
Stretching in pensive quietness between ; 

The venerable woods ; rivers that move 
In majesty, and the complaining brooks 
That make the meadows green ; and, poured round 

all, 
Old Ocean's gray and melancholy waste, 
Are but the solemn decorations all 
Of the great tomb of man. — Bryant. 



212 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

No. 

1. I have no (adj.) money. 

2. You shall see my face no (adv.) more. 

3. Have you seen him? No [a substitute for a sen- 
tence, and equivalent to "I have not seen him"]. 

4. And they asked him, Art thou that prophet ? And 
he answered, No (n.). 

5. And the angel lifted up his hand to heaven, and 
swore by him that liveth forever and ever, that there 
should be time no longer. 

6. No man hath seen God at any time. 

7. The word no may be used in four ways : 1st, as an 
adjective; 2d, as an adverb; 3d, as a substitute for a 
sentence ; and 4th, as a noun. 

None. 

1. Gold and silver have I none (adj.). 

2. Have you any gold or silver? I have none (n.). 

3. There is none (n. sing.) that doeth good. 

4. None (n. phi.) are so deaf as they that will not 
hear. 

5. Terms of peace were none vouchsafed. 

6. When the unclean spirit is gone out of a man, he 
walketh through dry places seeking rest and finding 
none. 

7. This is none other than the house of God. 

8. There are many more shining qualities in the mind 
of man, but there is none so useful as discretion [ ]. — 
Blair. 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 213 

9. Save his own good broadsword, he weapon had 
none. — Scott. 

10. None will flatter the poor, and the wise have very 
little power of nattering themselves. — Dr. Johnson. 

First. 

1. Adam was the first (adj.) man. 

2. Adam was created first (adv.), and Eve afterward. 

3. James the First (?i.) was the son of Mary, Queen 
of Scots. 

4. Young birds are at first destitute of feathers. 

5. Saturn first (a) taught the Italians agriculture. 

(a) First in this sentence is an adjective, because the meaning- 
is that Saturn was the first person who taught the Italians agricul- 
ture. 

6. The preceptor first taught his pupil reading, and 
then penmanship and calculation. 

7. Art thou he who first broke peace in heaven? — 
Milton. 

8. The road turns first to the right, and then to the 
left. 

Last. 

1. He has spent his last (adj.) dollar. 

2. I saw him last (adv.) at New York. 

3. The patient was to the last (n.) hopeful of recovery. 

4. He came at last. 

5. Eomulus reigned first, and Tarquin reigned last, as 
king of Rome. 

6. Join all ye living creatures to extol 

Him first, Him last, Him midst, Him without end. 



214 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

For. 

1. I waited patiently for (prep.) the Lord. 

2. Give thanks unto the Lord, for (conj.) he is good; 
for his mercy endureth forever. 

3. Give us oil for our lamps. 

4. Give us of your oil, for our lamps are gone out. 

Little. 

1. A little (adj.) boy was run over by a carriage. 

2. Such a man is little (adv.) better than nobody. 

3. Man wants but little (n.) here below, 
Nor wants that little long. 

4. The moon herself was not a little (adverbial phrase) 
puzzled to imagine what might become of her. 

5. Wait a little. 

6. Little by little he acquired a competency. 

7. He was paid too little for his services. 

8. Better is a little where love is, than a stalled ox 
and hatred therewith. 

Long. 

1. I have not seen my friend for a long (adj.) time. 
2. My friend has been long absent. 3. I long (v.) to 
see you. 4. How long did he stay? 5. His stay was 
too long. 

Enough. 

1. The miser never has enough (n.). 2. They have 
bread enough (adj.), and to spare. 3. He did not re- 
main long enough (adv.). 4. He cried " Enough ! " (n.) 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 215 

That. 

1. Hand me that (adj.) book. 

2. They on their way in social chat, 

Now talked of this, and then of that (n.). 

3. He that (rel. pron.) acts wisely deserves praise. 

4. He studies that (conj.) he may learn. 

5. That that I say is this, that that that that gentle- 
man has advanced is not that that he should have 
proved to your lordships. — Spectator. 

6. He said that that that, that that young lady parsed, 
Avas not that that that that gentleman had requested her 
to parse. — Kirhham. 

What. 

1. What (adj.) book is that? 

2. What (interrog. pron.) did he say ? 

3. I w r ill give him w T hat (rel. pron.) he wants. 

4. What! (inter jee.) is thy servant a dog? 

5. What a figure ! 

6. What if you should not know what the word ivhat 

is? 

7. What terms shall we find that have not been 
already exhausted ? 

8. With what forbearance, with what patience, with 
what courage did she endure her last illness ! — MelmotKs 
Pliny. 

Which. 

1. The bird which (rel. pron.) sung so sweetly has 
flown. 2. Which (interrog. pron.) is the man? 3. 
Which (adj.) horse will you ride? 



216 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Whatever and Whatsoever. 

1. Whatever is, is right (a). 

(a) Whatever is a relative pronoun, relating to thing under- 
stood as its antecedent — Rule VI; and nom. to is. — Rule VIII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Read thus: " Whatever [thing] is, [that thing] is right." What- 
ever will then be parsed as an adjective, qualifying thing under- 
stood. 

2. Whatever be our fate, be assured [ ] that this 
declaration will stand (a). 

(a) Read thus : " Our fate be whatever, be assured [of this thing, 
namely] that this declaration will stand." 

Whatever is a noun, etc., and nom. after be. 

Be is a verb ; subj., etc. 

That this declaration will stand is a substantive clause, 
etc., in apposition with thing understood. — Rule I. 

3. Whatever (adj.) books you read, read them with 
care. 

4. Every blessing we enjoy, by what means soever it 
may be derived upon us, is the gift of Him who is the 
Author of good, and the Father of mercies (a). — Addi- 
son. 

(a) Whatsoever is an adjective, qualifying means. — Rule VII. 

Somewhat. 

1. I have somewhat (n.) against thee. 

2. The moon appeared somewhat (adv.) larger than on 
the preceding night. 

Past. 

1. The season for sowing is past (adj.). 

2. I am hurt past (prep.) all surgery. — Shalcspeare. 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 217 

3. Time once past, never returns. 

4. We can not recall the past. 

5. I have enjoyed good health during the past year. 

Late. 

1. A late (adj.) frost destroyed the fruit. 2. We 

studied early and late (adv.). 3. I sat up till a late 

hour in the night. 4. He came too late. 5. It was 
late when he arrived. 

6. Too early seen unknown, and known too late. — 

Shaksjoeare. 

7. And round them throng, 
With leaps and bounds, the late imprisoned young. — 

Pope. 

Full. 

1. He has eaten a full (adj.) meal. 2. They have 
eaten to the full (n.). 3. He looked him full (adv.) in 
the face. 4. Your garden is full of weeds. 5. To-night 
the moon is full. 6. To-night we have full moon. 

7. The full of the moon is the time when it presents 
to the spectator its whole face illuminated. 

8. To full (y.) cloth is to thicken it in a mill. 

9. Full many a flower is born to blush unseen, 
And waste its sweetness on the desert air. — Gray. 

Just. 

1. Job was a just (adj.) mam 

2. The mail has just (adv.) arrived. 

3. The just shall live by faith. 

4. You have come just at the right moment. 

P. M.— 19. 



218 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Like. 

1. The son is like (adj.) the father. 

2. That man acts like (adv.) a fool. 
8. Every creature loves its like (n.). 

4. We like (v.) whatever gives us pleasure. 

5. The Assyrian came down like a wolf on the fold. 

6. The sheen of their spears was like (adj.) stars on 
the sea. 

7. Like the leaves of the forest when summer is green, 
That host with their banners at sunset were seen ; 
Like the leaves of the forest when autumn hath flown, 
That host on the morrow lay withered and strown. — 

Byron. 

Now. 

1. Now (adv.) fades the glimmering landscape on the 
sight. 

2. My well has never failed till now (n.). 

3. Nothing is there to come, and nothing past, 
But an eternal now does ever last. 

4. Then cried they all again, saying, Not this man, 
but Barabbas. Now (conj.) Barabbas was a robber. — 
John xviii: 40. 

5. Now Jesus loved Martha, and her sister Mary, and 
Lazarus. — John xi : 5. 

Even. 

1. Six is an even (adj.) number. 

2. Even (adv.) the publicans do the same. 

3. This will even (v.) all inequalities. 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 219 

4. When the even (71.) was come, they brought unto 
him many that were possessed of devils. 

5. Even now, where Alpine solitudes ascend, 
I sit me down a pensive hour to spend. 

6. And God, even (conj.) our own God, shall bless us. 

Distinguished. 

1. The soldier distinguished (v.) himself by his bravery. 

2. Wellington was a distinguished (adj.) general. 

3. The different grades of military officers may be dis- 
tinguished (part.) from each other by their shoulder- 
straps. 

Such. 

1. Such (adj.) is the society of that blest abode. — 
Blair. 

2. Of snch (n.) are the multitude who shall stand 
before the throne. — Id. 

Any. 

1. Have you any (adj.) bread? 2. We have not any 
(?i.). 3. Have you any (adv.) more wine? 

Blessed. 

1. Isaac blessed (v.) Jacob. 2. Jacob was blessed 
(part.) by Isaac. 3. Blessed (adj.) are the merciful. 

Note. — Blessed, when used as a verb or participle, is a word 
of one svllable; when used as an adjective, it is a word of two syl- 
lables. A similar remark may be made in reference to other words 
ending in ed, and which are sometimes verbs, and sometimes adjec- 
tives. 



220 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

CUKSED. 

1. Noah cursed (v.) Canaan. 2. Canaan was cursed 
(part) by Noah. 3. Depart, ye cursed (a). 

(a) Cursed is an adjective, qualifying the noun ones under- 
stood.— Kule VII. 

OTHERWISE. 

Cursed is an adjective used as a noun ; com., 3d, plu., masc, 
nom. independent, and put in apposition with ye. — Rule I. 

Slow. 

1. A needless Alexandrine ends the song, 

That, like a w T ounded snake, drags its slow (adj.) 
length along. — Pope. 

2. When Ajax strives some rock's vast weight to throw, 
The line, too, labors, and the words move slow 

(adv.). — Pope. 

3. First march the heavy mules securely slow; 

O'er hills, o'er dales, o'er crags, o'er rocks they 
go. — Pope. 

Quick. 

1. The patient's pulse is too quick (adj.). 

2. The patient's pulse beats too quick (adv.). 

3. The surgeon probed the wound to the quick (n. 
dug.). 

4. God will judge the quick (n. plu.) and the dead. 

Fast. 

1. The nail is fast (adj.) in the wall. 

2. The nail sticks fast (adv.) in the wall. 

3. His horse runs fast. 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 221 

4. He rides a fast horse. 

5. Fast (adv.) by the throne obsequious Fame resides. — 
Pope. 

6. A fast (n.) is a period of abstinence from food. 

7. To fast (i>.) is to abstain from food. 

8. A fast (adj.) day is a day appointed for religious 
fasting. 

9. He spake, and it stood fast. — Blair. 

Crooked. 

1. The boy crooked (v.) his finger. 2. The boy's 
finger was crooked by himself. 3. The boy had a 
crooked (adj.) finger. 

Sore. 

1. The boy has a sore (n.) on his leg. 2. The boy has 
a sore (adj.) leg. 3. He began to be sore (adv.) amazed. 

Adieu. 

1. He bade his friends adieu (n.). 2. Adieu! adieu! 
(inter j.) my native land. 



1. Please give me a (adj.) glass of water. 2. Peter 
said, "I go a (prep.) -fishing." 

After. 

1. He ran after (prep.) me. 2. He died soon after 
(adv.). 3. He came after (conj. adv.) you left. 

Again. 

1. He came again (adv.). 2. Again (conj.), it may 
happen that, etc. 



222 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Alike. 

1. Those children look alike (adj.). 2. He treats all 
alike (adv.). 

Before. 

1. He went before (adv.) as a guide. 2. He went 
before (prep.) the company. 3. Washington died before 
(co?ij. adv.) my grandfather was born. 

Better^ 

1, James is a better (adj.) scholar than John. 2. 

Mary can write better (adv.) than Susan. 3. They 

scorn their betters (n.). 4. "Love betters (v.) what is 
best." 

By. 

1. He passed by (adv.) on the other side. 2. He went 
by (prep.) the Baltimore and Ohio Railroad. 

Close. 

1. This room is too close (adj.). 2. He followed close 
(adv.) behind. 

Except. 

1. He did not except (v.) against any of the terms of 
the proposed treaty. 

2. Except (conj.) the Lord build the house, they labor 
in vain that build it. 

3. We could see nothing except (prep.) the sky. 

Far. 

1. He came from a far (adj.) country. 2. He came 
from far (n.). 3. He is far (adv.) from home. 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH. 223 

Farewell. 

1. He bade his friends a last farewell (?i.). 2. The 
pastor preached a farewell (adj.) sermon. 3. "Fare- 
well !" (interj.). 

Hard. 
1. This is hard (adj.) work. 2. He works hard (adv.). 

However. 

1. The patient must take the medicine, however (adv.) 
unpalatable it may be. 2. That event, however (conj.), 
can never happen. 

III. 

1. It is an ill (adj.) wind that blows nobody good. 
2. The prisoners fared very ill (adv.). 3. The ill (n.) 
that can't be cured must be endured. 

Notwithstanding. 

1. He helped the poor, notwithstanding (prep.) his 
own poverty. 2. The teacher is kind, notwithstanding 
(conj.) he is strict. 

Once. 

1. Please favor me just this once (n.). 2. I visit my 
parents once (adv.) a year. 

Only. 

1. He was an only (adj.) son. 2. You are not in 
earnest ; you are only (adv.) pretending. 

Over. 

1. We passed over (prep.) the bridge. 2. The army 
passed over (adv.). 3. For lo ! the winter is past, the 
rain is over (adj.) and gone. 



224 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Eight. 

1. I claim my right (n.). 2. He does not pursue the 
right (adj.) course. 3. A bishop is styled Right (adv.) 
Reverend. 

Save. 

1. Save (v.), Lord, or I perish. 2. And that no man 
might buy or sell, save (com.) he that had the mark. 

3. He had no weapon save (prep.) a sword. 

So. 

1. Why are you so (adv.) vain? 2. As in Adam all 
die, so (conj.) in Christ shall all be made alive. 

Till. 

1. The money is in the till (n.). 2. Farmers till (v.) 
the ground. 3. We will remain till (prep.) Monday. 

4. I will wait till (conj. adv.) you come. 

When. 

1. Since when (n.) has he been gone? 2. When (adv.) 
did he come? 3. When (conj. adv.) I was in Washing- 
ton, I visited the president. 

While. 

1. It is not worth while (n.) to engage in such trifling 
pursuits. 2. We will while (v.) away an hour or two. 
3. I wrote a letter while (conj. adv.) waiting for the 
train. 

Worse. 

1. In getting married, the parties take each other for 
better or for worse (n.). 2. The patient is worse (adj.). 
3. He might do w r orse (adv.). 



TRANSPOSITION. 225 



ARTICLE XXII. 



TRANSPOSITION. 

Eemarks. — 1. When the words of a sentence are arranged ac- 
cording to the order of thought, the words are said to be arranged 
according to their natural order. 

2. When the words of a sentence are arranged according to the 
requirements of idiomatic usage, the words are said to be arranged 
in their grammatical order. 

3. When a word or clause of a sentence is shifted from its natural 
position to a place where it does not naturally belong, the word or 
clause is said to be transposed. 

4. When a word or clause which would naturally stand first is 
placed last, or when a word or clause which would naturally stand 
last is placed first, the order of the words or clauses is said to be 
inverted. 

5. In the English language, the grammatical arrangement of 
words usually coincides with the natural ; but they do not always 
coincide. Thus, Where is my hat? is a grammatical arrangement, 
while My hat is where f would be the natural arrangement of the 
same words. 

Suggestion. — In all examples of transposed or inverted sen- 
tences, let the pupil arrange the words and clauses in their natural 
order before parsing the sentences. 

Section 1. 

The verb is sometimes placed first by inversion, and the 
subject nominative last. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Where is my hat? 

NATURAL ORDER. 

My hat is where? 



226 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

2. Whence comes this sound? 

3. How stands the account? 

4. Why shrinks the soul 

Back on herself, and startles at destruction ? — Ad- 
dison. 

5. Burned Marmion's swarthy cheek like fire. — Scott. 

6. And dar'st thou, then, 

To beard the lion in his den? — Scott. 

7. Cromwell, I charge thee fling away ambition ; 
By this sin fell the angels. — Shakspeare. 

8. But yonder comes the powerful king of day, 
Rejoicing in the east. — Thomson. 

9. Great is Diana of the Ephesians. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

Diana of the Ephesians is great. 

10. There came to the beach a poor exile of Erin. — 
Campbell. 

11. Sounds the busy deck 
With notes of preparation. — Wilson. 

12. With a low, insidious moan, 

Rush past the gales that harbinger thy sway. — 
Wilson. 

13. Gloom the murky clouds 

Darker around, and heave the maddening waves 
Higher their crested summits. — Wilson. 

14. So spake the grisly terror. — Milton. 

15. I went to a bright room, where were music, and 
dancing, and sweet flowers. 

16. Henceforth there is laid up for me a crown of 
righteousness. 



TRAXSPOSITIOX. 227 

17. Remote from cities lived a swain, 

Un vexed with all the cares of gain. — Gay. 

18. At the head of the van-guard rode, upon a snow- 
white palfrey, the bishop of Avila. — Bulwer. 

19. At the same moment, louder than the tramp of 
horse or the clash of arms, was heard distinctly the 
solemn chant of Te Denm, which preceded the blaze of 
the unfurled and lofty standards. — Id. 

20. By a small mosque halted the flower of the 
army. — Id. 

Section 2. 

The predicate nominative is sometimes placed before the 
verb by transposition, and the subject nominative after the 
verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Who is that man? 

NATURAL ORDER. 

That man is who? 

2. What is that object ? 

3. Which is the house ? 

4. The wages of sin is death. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

Death is the wages of sin. 

5. Thine are the people and the city of Granada. — 
Bidwer. 

6. Old King Cole was a jolly old soul, 
And a jolly old soul was he. 

7. Seven boys and girls are we. — Wordsivorth. 



228 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

Section 3. 

The subject is sometimes placed by transposition between 
the auxiliary and the principal verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Very pleasantly did the hours pass. — Home. 

2. This elegant rose, had I shaken it less, 

Might have bloomed with its owner a while. — 
Cowper. 

3. How has kind Heaven adorned our happy land, 
And scattered blessings with a liberal hand ! — Ad- 
dison. 

Section 4. 

The predicate adjective is sometimes placed by inversion 
before, and the subject nominative after, the copula. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Sweet [ ] the pleasure, 
Rich [ ] the treasure, 

Sweet is pleasure after pain. — Dryden. 

NATURAL OPvDER. 

The pleasure is sweet, 

The treasure is rich, 

The pleasure is sweet after pain. 

2. Sw T eet is the breath of morn. — Milton. 

3. Pleasant [ ] the sun 
When first on this delightful land he spreads 
His orient beams on herb, tree, fruit, and flower, 
Glistening with dew ; fragrant [ ] the fertile earth 
After soft showers ; and sweet the coming on 

Of grateful evening mild. — Milton. 



TBAXSPOSITION. 229 

4. Blessed are the peace-makers. 

5. Feeble are all the pleasures in which the heart has 
no share. — Blair. 

6. Short are the triumphs of wit when it is supposed 
to be the vehicle of malice. — Id. 

7. How quick, how total is the transit of such persons ! 
how short, alas ! [ ] the day of their rejoicing ! — Young. 

8. Soft is the strain when Zephyr gently blows. — 
Pope. 

9. J T was in autumn, and stormy and dark w r as the 

night, 
And fast were the windows and door. — Southey. 

10. Alone, upon a balcony commanding a view of the 
beautiful landscape, stood Boabdil, the last of the Moor- 
ish kings. — Buliver. 

Section 5. 

The subject and predicate nominatives are sometimes both 
placed before the copida, the predicate nominative being 
placed before the verb by transposition, while the subject 
nominative occupies that position as its natural place. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. And hoary peaks that proudly prop 
The skies thy dwellings are. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

Hoary peaks, etc., are thy dwellings. 

2. The emotion and excitement were too much for her, 
heroine and queen though she was. — Bulwer. 



230 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 6, 

The objective case may be placed by inversion before its 
governing verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Where is she, the poor maniac, whose wildly fixed 

eyes 
Seem a heart overcharged to express? — Southey. 

2. No aid, no compassion, the maniac will seek. — Id. 

3. And she saw in the moonlight two ruffians appear, 
And between them a corpse they did bear. — Id. 

4. And she beheld them in safety pass on by her side; 
She seizes the hat, fear her courage supplied, 
And fast through the abbey she flies. 

5. My manner of life know all the Jews. 

6. His face deep scars of thunder had intrenched. — 
Milton. 

7. The work some praise, and some [ ] the architect. — 
Milton. 

8. My fate unknown my friends bewail ; 
O jailer, haste that fate to tell, 

O haste my father's heart to cheer. — Lewis. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

My friends bewail my unknown fate, etc. 
Section 7. 

An adverb or adverbial phrase may be placed by transpo- 
sition before the verb tvhich it qualifies. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Soon after, his understanding failed. — Young. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

His understanding failed soon after. 



TRAXSPOSITIOX. 231 

2. In what a dismal gloom they set ! — Id. 

3. For a moment they glitter, they dazzle ! In a mo- 
ment, where are they? — Id. 

4. In the long-living annals of infamy their triumphs 
are recorded. — Id. 

5. With what capacity was he endowed ! with what 
advantages for being greatly good ! — Id. 

6. By constantly amusing thyself with the errors and 
misconduct of others, thou mayest render thyself equally 
ridiculous and culpable. — Trans, from Fenelon. 

7. To thee the clarions raised their swell, 
And the dying warrior prayed. — Percival. 

8. There on the silent and lonely shore, 

For ages I watched alone, 
And the world in its darkness asked no more 
Where the glorious bird had flown. — Id. 

9. At midnight, in his guarded tent, 

The Turk lay dreaming of the hour 
When Greece, her knee in suppliance bent, 
Should tremble at his power. 

Section 8. 

Ttie preposition placed by transposition after its object. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Whom did you send for? 

NATURAL ORDER. 

You did send for whom ? 

2. Which candidate did you vote for? 

3. What are you thinking about? 

4. Methinks a man's courage would now be well tried 
Who Avoulcl wander the ruins about. — Southey. 

5. Safe they sleep the green turf under. 



232 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

6. Wild Carron's lonely woods among. 

7. What might not that savage greatness of soul, 
which appears in these poor wretches on many occasions, 
be raised to, [ ] were it rightly cultivated ! — Addison. 

8. I have received the book that (a) I sent for. 

(a) The relative that is in the objective case, and is governed 
by for. 

9. I hit the mark that I aimed at. 

10. He has returned to the place that he came from. 

11. He conforms to the customs of the people that he 
lives among. 

12. I am sensible of the obligation that I am placed 
under by your kindness. 

13. There are few folks in the country that I don't 
know something of. 

14. To complete the scene, the full moon rose, at 
length, in that clouded majesty which Milton takes 
notice of. — Addison. 

Section 9. 

A dependent clause may be placed by transposition before 
the clause on ivhich it depends. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. When the sky falls we will catch larks {a). 

Remark. — "When two clauses are connected by a conjunction, or 
conjunctive adverb, in the natural order of arrangement the con- 
nective stands between the clauses. 

(a) The clauses of this sentence are the sky falls and ive ivill catch 
larks, and the conjunctive adverb when is the connective. Eut since 
the connective does not stand between the clauses, we conclude, in 
accordance with the foregoing remark, that the order in which the 
clauses stand is an inverted one, and that the following is the 

NATURAL ORDER. 

We will catch larks when the sky falls. 



TRANSPOSITION. 233 

2. Wheresoever the carcass is, there will the eagles be 
gathered together. 

3. Except the Lord build the house, they labor in 
vain that build it. 

4. While the bridegroom tarried, they all slumbered 
and slept. 

5. As the old man drove up, I observed that both the 
shafts of his gig were broken. 

6. And now one night, in musing mood, 

As all alone he sat, 
The unwelcome messenger of Fate 
Once more before him stood. 

7. If your lordship find him not a knave, take me 
henceforth for a fool. — Shakspeare. 

8. When sports went round, and all were gay 
On neighbor Dobson's wedding-day, 
Death called aside the jocund groom 
With him into another room. 

9. Till the waters waste from the sea, till the river 
faileth and is dry land, man lieth low and riseth not 
again. 

10. Till the heavens are old he shall not awake, nor 
be aroused from his sleep. 

11. When Aristotle was asked what a man could gain 
by telling a falsehood, he replied, "Not to be believed 
when he speaks the truth." 

12. When we have no pleasure in goodness, we may 
with certainty conclude the reason to be that our pleas- 
ures are all derived from an opposite quarter. — Blair. 

13. When Ajax strives some rock's vast weight to 

throw, 
The line, too, labors, and the words move slow. — 

Pope. 
P. M.— 20. 



234 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

14. While bad men snatch the pleasures of the world 
as if by stealth, without countenance from the great 
Proprietor of the world, the righteous sit openly down to 
the feast of life, under the smile of approving heaven. — 
Blair. 

15. When thou comparest thy condition with thy 
desert, blush and be ashamed of thy complaints. — Id. 

16. When there is nothing from without to disturb 
the prosperous, a secret poison operates within. — Id. 

17. When we look around us on the world, we every- 
where behold a busy multitude intent on the prosecution 
of various designs, which their wants or desires have 
suggested. — Id. 

18. When man revolted from his Maker, his passions 
rebelled against himself. — Id. 

19. Since the time that reason began to exert her 
powers, thought during our waking hours has been 
active in every breast, without a moment's suspension 
or pause. — Id. 

Section 10. 

Predicate adjectives may be placed by transposition before 
nouns and pronouns ivhich they qualify. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. [(a)] Unmoved, the embodied Greeks their fury 
dare, 
And [(a)] fixed, [(&)] support the weight of all the 
war. — Pope's Horn. Iliad. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

The embodied Greeks being unmoved, dare their 
fury, etc. 

(a) Supply "being." (b) Supply "they." 



TRANSPOSITION. 235 

2. Thus, [ ] obstinate to death, they fight, they fall; 
Nor these can keep, nor those can win the wall. — 
Id. 

Section 11. 

Adjectives may be placed by transposition after their nouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A character so exalted, so strenuous, so various, so 
authoritative, astonished a corrupt age ; and the treasury 
trembled at the name of Pitt, through all its classes of 
venality. — Robertson. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

So exalted, so strenuous, so various, so authoritative 
a character astonished a corrupt age, etc. 

2. On the cold cheek of death smiles and roses are 

blending, 
And beauty immortal awakes from the tomb. 

3. The soul of origin divine, 

In heaven's eternal sphere shine 
A star of day. — Montgomery. 

4. When yonder spheres sublime, 

Pealecl their first notes to sound the march of 
time. — Campbell. 

Section 12. 

Participles may be placed by transposition before their 
subjects. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Refusing to hear any thing from me, or to take any 
thing from the physician, he lay silent, as far as sudden 
darts of pain Avould permit, till the clock struck. — Young. 

NATURAL ORDER. 

He refusing, etc., lay silent. 



236 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

2. Observing that his friend was much touched, even 
to tears, he said, " Keep those tears for thyself." — Id. 

3. Thine are the people and the city of Granada: 
yielding to thy prowess, they yet confide in thy mercy. — 
Bulwer. 

4. Joining his companions, he [Boabdil] proceeded 
without delay upon his melancholy path. — Id. 



ARTICLE XXIII. 



ELLIPSIS. 

Section 1. 

Ellipsis of the subject 

EXAMPLES. 

1. We entered boldly, and [ ] had not* proceeded far 
before the supposed statue of a giant presented itself to 
our view. 

2. If any one would sing, he attends a master, [ ] is 
drilled in the very elementary principles, and only after 
the most laborious process dares [ ] to exercise his voice 
in public. — Ware. 

3. She cast her eyes upon herself, then turned them 
upon those that were present, to see how they liked her, 
and often looked on the figure [which] she made in her 
own shadow. — Tattler. 



ELLIPSIS. 237 

Section 2. 

Ellipsis of the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. sailor boy. sailor boy, peace [ ] to thy soul. 

2. Xot a drum was heard, not a funeral note [ ], 
As his cor.-e to the rampart we hurried. — Wolfe. 

3. Yet a few days [ a)], and thee the all-beholding sun 

Shall see no more in all his course, 
(a) Supply " shall elapse." 

4. They shall wither as the green herb [ ]. 

5. Some boasted of one thing, and some [ ] of another. 

6. Let Virgil sing the praises of Augustus. [ ] genius 
celebrate merit, and [ ] flattery extol the talents of the 
great, I siug the virtues of Flor SiliiL 

7. Who hath woe? who hath sorrow? who hath bab- 
blings ? who hath redness of eyes ? They that tarry long 
at the wine [(a)]. 

(a) Supply ''have woe. have sorrow, have babblings, and have 
redness of eyes." 

8. Dryden knew more of man in his general nature, 
and Pope [ ] in his local manners. 

9. The style of Dryden is capricious and varied; that 
of Pope, [ ] cautious and uniform. 

10. Her beauty was natural and easy ; her person [ 
clean and unspotted ; her eyes [ ] cast toward the ground 
with an agreeable reserve : her motion and behavior [ ] 
full of modesty, and her raiment [ ] as white as snow. 

11. Strength departed from his hands, and agility [ 
from his feet. — Johnson. 

12. There was nothing for memory to dwell on (a) 
that could soothe the pang of separation : [1] none of 



238 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

those tender though melancholy circumstances which en- 
dear the parting scene ; [2] nothing to melt sorrow into 
those blessed tears, sent like the dews of heaven to revive 
the heart in the anguish of the parting hour. 

(a) To clwell on is a verb; coin p., irreg., trans., inf., pres., 
relating to mind as its subject, and governing which understood as 
its object. For memory to dwell on is an abridgment of the sentence 
on which memory might dwell. 

Note. — The ellipsis marked [1] should be supplied with " there 
were," and that marked [2] with " there was." 

Section 3. 

Ellipsis of the auxiliary. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Every debt would be paid; every commodity [] 
sold at its just value; every article of merchandise [ 
exhibited in its true character ; every promise [ ] faith- 
fully performed; every dispute [] amicably adjusted; 
every man's character [ ] held in just estimation ; every 
rogue and cheat [ ] banished from society, and the whole 
world [" ] transformed into an abode of honesty and 
peace. 

2. Before that assembly every man's good deeds will 
be declared, and his most secret sins [ ] disclosed. 

3. The sinner is moved and [ ] shaken by every wind 
of fortune. — Blair. 

4. He [the upright man] can wrap himself up in a 
good conscience, and [ ] look forward without terror to 
the end of the world. — Blair. 

5. The righteous man flourishes like a tree which is 
not only admired by all for its beauty, but [ ] blessed 
by the traveler for shade, and by the hungry for the 
sustenance it hath given. — Blair. 



ELLIPSIS. 239 

6. The most atrocious criminals have been exempted 
from deserved jninishnient, and men of the most unex- 
ceptionable characters [ ] condemned and [ ] banished 
unheard. — Trans, from Cicero. 

7. The soldiery and sailors belonging to a province 
under the protection of the commonwealth have been 
starved to death ; whole fleets, to the great detriment of 
the province, [ ] suffered to perish. — Trans, from Cicero, 

Section 4. 

Ellipsis of being before the past participle passive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Damocles, [ | intoxicated with pleasure, fancied 
himself [to be] among superior beings. — Trans, from 
Cicero. 

2. [ ] Admired and [ ] applauded, he became vain. 

3. [ ] United, we stand ; [ ] divided, we fall. 

4. [ ] Endowed with great command over herself, she 
[Queen Elizabeth] soon obtained an uncontrolled as- 
cendency over the people. — Hume. 

5. [ ] Deeply affected by their certain knowledge of 
the dangers to which he was exposing himself, all the 
assembly were melted into tears. — Blair. 

6. [ ] Charged with rich gifts from the king, he 
[Hazael] presents himself before the prophet. — Blair. 

Section 5. 

Ellipsis of the participle being before adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. [ ] Cautious without timidity, | bold without 
rashness, [ ] cool in council, [ ] firm and deliberate in 



240 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

action, [ ] clear in foresight, [ ] patient under reverses, 
[ ] persevering, steady, and self-possessed, lie met and 
conquered every obstacle. 

2. He stopped in the road, [ ] afraid to proceed. 

3. [ ] Scrupulously exact in all his dealings, and [ 
assiduous in the discharge of all his duties, he had 
acquired the good- will and esteem of all who knew him. 

4. [ ] Happy in his own integrity, [ ] conscious of 
the esteem of good men, reposing a firm trust in the 
providence and promises of God, he [the upright man] 
is exempt from servile dependence on other things. 

5. [ ] Deficient in refinement rather than in strength, 
his style was less elegant and correct than [(a)] animated 
and impressive. 

(a) Supply "it was." 

Section 6. 

Ellipsis of the infinitive to be between an adjective attri- 
bute and an objective ivhich the adjective qualifies. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I think it [ ] impossible. 2. They thought it [ " 
safe. 3. I believe him [ ] honest. 4. They think him 
" ] capable of performing the duty. 5. The jury pro- 
nounced the prisoner [ ] innocent of the charge. 

Section 7. 

Ellipsis of the principal verb, the auxiliary being expressed. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Can you go? I can [ ]. 2. Has he come? He 
has [ ]. 3. Will he return? He will [ ]. 4. Must he 
stay? He must [ ]. 5. Have the goods been sold? 



ELLIPSIS. 241 

They have [ ]. 6. I have done all that I could [ ]. 
7. I could not go if I would [ ], and I would not go 
if I could [ ]. 

Section 8. 

Ellipsis of both the verb and its subject. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. An emotion may have a cause, but [ ] not an 
object. 

2. We first leave childhood behind us, then [ ] youth, 
then [ ] the years of ripened manhood, then [ ] the better 
and more pleasing part of old age. 

Note. — The ellipsis to be here supplied is " we leave behind 

us." 

3. What doth the poor man's son inherit ? [ ] Strong 
muscles and a sinewy heart. 

4. In all his manners he [the upright man] is simple 
and unaffected ; in all his proceedings, [ ] open and 
consistent. — Blair. 

5. How T were we struck ! Yet soon after, [ "| still 
more. — Young. 

6. What have you in that basket? [1] Apples [2]? 
No. [1] Pears [2] ? No. [1] Peaches [2] ? No. 

Note. — The ellipses marked [1] are to be supplied with "have 
you," and those marked [2] with " in that basket." 

7. But what have I lost ? [ ] Nothing that w T as neces- 
sary to my happiness. — Bulwer. 

Section 9. 

Ellipsis of the subject and the auxiliary* 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Seven years of the first ten had vanished, and [ " 
left nothing behind them. — Br. Johnson. 
P. M.— 21. 



242 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

2. The child was accidentally separated from his com- 
panions, and [ ] lost. 

3. Her spirit was shocked and [ ] driven in by horror. 

4. We can attend to some ideas, and | dismiss 
others.— Karnes. 

5. When [ ] thrown into prison by the artifices of a 
false woman, his integrity and prudence soon rendered 
him conspicuous even in that dark mansion. — Blair. 

6. But my soul, as if | ] stung up by torment to 
greater strength and spirit, is full powerful to reason, 
full mighty to suffer. — Young. 

Section 10. 

Ellipsis of the principal verb, together with an adverb or 
adverbial phrase qualifying it. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Can the pigeon fly swiftly? It can [ ]. 2. Do 
your horses work well? They do [ ]. 3. Does Mary 
study diligently? She does [ ]. 4. Have you passed 
your time pleasantly? I have [ ]. 5. Do the wealthy 
always live contentedly? They do not [ ]. 6. Can the 
task be easily accomplished ? It can not [ ]. 

Section 11. 

Ellipsis of the verb and its object. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. What would content you ? [(a)] Talent [(&)] ? No. 
[ ] Enterprise [ ] ? No. [ ] Keputation [ ] ? No. [ ] 
Virtue [ ] ? No. 

(a) Supply " would." 

(6) Supply "content you." 



ELLIPSIS. 243 

2. Great praise the Duke of Marlborough won, 
And our young prince Eugene [ ]. 

3. I am persuaded [ a)] that I ought to suffer death 
rather than [(6)] my friend [(c)]. — Trans, from FeneUm. 

Supply "of this thing, namely." 
! -apply "that." 
'-' Supply " ought to sutler death.'' 

Section 12. 

Ellipsis of the principal verb, together with its object, the 
uxiliary being expressed. 



a 



EXAMPLE-. 

1. Have you heard the news? I have [ ]. 2. Do you 
know that man'/ I do [ ]. 3. Can you read Latin? I 
can [ ]. 4. Do you understand French? I do [ ]. 5. 
Have you seen the president? I have [ ]. 6. Will you 
do me a favor? I will [ ]. 

Section 13. 

Ellipsis of the principal verb, together with the object of 
the verb, and an adverb or adverbial phrase modifying the 
verb. 

EXAMPLE-. 

1. Have they done the work well? They have [ ]. 

2. Will they settle the affair amicably? They will []. 

3. Have you taken the letter to the post-office? I 
have [ ]. 

4. Did they finish the work in good season? Thev 

did [ ]. 

5. Will the farmer take his corn to market? He 
will [ ]. 

6. Did thev send [a messenger] for a doctor? Thev 

did [ ]. 



244 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

Section 14. 

Ellipsis of the predicate nominative. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Is that lad your son? He is [ ]. 2. Was Paul an 
apostle? He was [ ]. 3. Is this the horse that you 
bought at the fair? It is [" ]. 4. James is a good 
reader, but Henry is not [ ]. 5. Did their enterprise 
prove a failure ? It did [ ]. 6. Has your brother be- 
come a farmer ? He has [ ]. 

Section 15. 

Ellipsis of the predicate adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Are you hungry? I am [ ]. 2. Have you been 
sick? I have [ ]. 3. Is he industrious? He is [ ]. 
4. Have the American people become powerful? They 
have [ ]. 5. Has the medicine been found efficacious ? 
It has [ ]. 6. Has that officer proved to be incompetent? 
He has [ ]. 

Section 16. 

Ellipsis of the relative pronouns. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The ancient room [ ] she had seemed to fill with 
life, the garden [ ] she had tended, the eyes [ ] she had 
gladdened, the paths [ ] she had trodden, could know her 
no more. 

2. I can not contain the joy [ ] your presence creates. 

3. Be on your guard against every body [ ] you do 
not know. 



ELLIPSIS. 245 

4. Behold the corn [ ] you lent [to] us. 

5. Every meal [ ] he swallows, every coat [ ] he puts 
on his back, every dollar [ ] he borrows, appears before 
the country in some formal document. 

6. And now the bell [ ] she had so often heard, by 
night and [by] day, and [(a)] listened to with solemn 
pleasure, rung its remorseless toll. 

(a) Supply " which she had." 

7. What is this [ ] absorbs me quite, 

] Drowns my senses, [ ] shuts my sight, 

] Steals my spirit, [ ] draws my breath ? 

Tell me, my soul, can this be death? — Pope. 

Section 17. 

Ellipsis of the relative and copula before adjectives. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. By living in that barbarous age, he [King Alfred] 
was deprived of historians [(a)] worthy to transmit his 
name to posterity. 

(a) Supply " who were." 

2. His memory might have left a sweet fragrance be- 
hind, [(a)] grateful to the surviving and salutary to the 
rising generation. 

(a) Supply "which would have been" 

3. The spleen is a complication of all the disorders 
[(a)] incident to man. 

(a) Supply "which are." 

4. There is something [(a)] very unfavorable to im- 
pression in the expectation that you are to be greatly 
impressed. 

(a) Supply "which is." 



246 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

5. Seest thou a man [ ] diligent in his business ? He 
shall stand before kings. 

6. She [Lady Jane Gray] expressed a great indiffer- 
ence for other occupations [ ] usual with her sex and 
station. 

Section 18. 

Ellipsis of the relative and copula before the past participle 
passive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Man [ ] born of woman is of few days and full of 
trouble. — Job. 

2. Let a man meet a bear [(a)] robbed of her whelps, 
rather than a fool in his folly. 

(a) Supply "which has been." 

3. A man [ ] besotted by intemperance is a disgusting 
object. 

4. Indian corn [ ] coarsely broken is called hominy. 

5. Grain [ ] finely pulverized is called meal or flour. 

6. Wool or fur [ ] formed into cloth by rolling and 
pressure is called felt. 

7. Hides [ ] saturated with tan are called leather. 

Section 19. 

Ellipsis of the antecedent. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. For [he] who goes up your winding stair, 
Will ne'er come down again. 

2. [ ] Who steals my purse steals trash. 

3. [ ] Who dainties love 

Shall beggars prove. — Franklin. 



ELLIPSIS. 247 

4. Invidious Grave ! how dost thou rend asunder 

] Whom love has knit, and sympathy [has] made 
one ! — Blair. 

5. [ ] Who loves a garden loves a green-house, too. — 
Coivper. 

6. [ ] Who lives to nature rarely can be poor ; 

] Who lives to fancy never can be rich. 

Section 20. 

Ellipsis of nouns governing the possessive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. These books are Mary's [ ]. 2. I bought the goods 
at Martin's [ ]. 3. They worship at St. Paul's [ ]. 4. 
The measure gained the king's [ ] as well as the people's 
approbation. 5. John's [ ] and David's boots fit them 
very well. 

Section 21. 

Ellipsis of the noun to which an adjective relates. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A new sorrow recalls the former [ ]. 

2. [ ] Farthest from him is best (a). 

(a) Bead thus : " The place which is farthest from him is best." 

3. To w T hom they all gave heed, from the least [ ] even 
unto the greatest [ ]. 

4. Every one can distinguish an angry [ | from a 
placid | ], a cheerful j | from a melancholy [ ], a 
thoughtful [ ] from a thoughtless [ ], and a dull [ 
from a penetrating countenance. 



248 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

5. He came unto his own [(a)]? anc ^ his own [(a)] 
received him not. 

(a) Supply ''people." 

6. There are three genders: the masculine [(a)], the 
feminine [(a)], and the neuter [(a)]. 

(a) Supply " gender," and parse the three singular nouns gender 
understood as being in apposition with the plural noun genders. 

Section 22. 

Ellipsis of adverbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Nothing can be more interesting and [ ] pathetic 
than this discourse of Judah. — Blair. 

2. As human life grew more refined, many conven- 
iences were devised to render it more commodious and 
[ ] agreeable. 

3. A river extremely deep and [ ] rapid is here poured 
precipitately down a ledge of rocks, that rises like a wall 
across the whole breadth of its stream. — Goldsmith. 

4. The weather is very warm and [ ] dry. 

Section 23. 

Ellipsis of the prepositions. 
(a) Ellipsis of prepositions before nouns of time. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. My uncle arrived [ ] an hour ago (a). 

2. The train leaves [ ] fifteen minutes before three 

3. I will remain in town [ ] three days (c). 



ELLIPSIS. 249 

4. My brother is [ ] ten years old. 

5. The ivy that clung to the oak was [ ] centuries 
old. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Hour is a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by the prep. 
about or at understood. — Rule IV. 

Ago is an adverb, qualifying the verb arrived. — Rule XII. 

[About] an hour is an adverbial phrase, qualifying the ad- 
verb ago.— Rule XII. 

[About] an hour ago is an adverbial phrase, qualifying the 
verb arrived. — Rule XII. 

(6) Minutes is a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by about or at 
understood. — Rule IV. 

Kefore three is an adverbial phrase, qualifying the verb 
leaves. — Rule XII. 

[At] fifteen minutes is an adverbial phrase, qualifying the 
adverbial phrase before three o> clock. — Rule XII. 

[At] fifteen minutes before three o'clock is a com- 
plex adverbial phrase, qualifying the verb leaves. — Rule XII. 

(c) I>ays is a noun, etc., in the obj. case, and is governed by the 
prep, during understood. — Rule IV. 

[During] three clays is an adverbial phrase, qualifying the 
verb will remain. — Rule XII. 

■(b) Ellipsis of prepositions before nouns of measure, 

EXAMPLES. 

1. This rule is [ ] two feet long (a). 

2. That wall is [ ] thirty inches thick. 

3. The water in the harbor is [ ] six fathoms deep. 

4. The weather is [ ] ten degrees colder to-day than it 
was yesterday (6). 

5. The earth is [ ] sixty-four times larger than the 
moon (c). 



250 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) Feet is a noun, etc.; obj., and governed by the preposi- 
tional phrase to the extent of understood.— Kule IV. 

[To the extent of] two feet is an adverbial phrase, qual- 
ifying the adj. long. — Kule XII. 

(6) Degrees is a noun, etc.; obj., and governed by the prep. 
by understood. — Kule IV. 

[By] ten degrees is an adverbial phrase, qualifying colder. — 
Kule XII. 

(c) Times is a noun, etc. ; obj., and governed by the prep, by 
understood. — Kule IV. 

[By] sixty-four times is an adverbial phrase, qualifying 
the adj. larger. — Kule XII. 

Section 24. 

Ellipsis of the preposition TO. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Friends, Romans, countrymen, lend [ ] me your 
ears. — Shakspeare. 

2. I thrice presented [ ] him a kingly crown, 
Which he did thrice refuse. — Id. 

3. I should do [ | Brutus wrong, and [ | Cassius 
wrong. — Id. 

4. He [the upright man] never shows [ ] us a smiling 
face, while he meditates evil against us in his heart. — 
Blair. 

Section 25. 

Ellipsis of to as the sign of the infinitive. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Charity teaches us to slight and [ ] despise no 
man. — Blair. 



ELLIPSIS. 251 

2. He has seen peace and war [ ] succeed each other 
in their turns. — Id. 

3. He who implores strength and courage from above 
will find danger and difficulty [ ] give way before him. — 
Dr. Johnson. 

Section 26, 

Ellipsis of the preposition for before the infinitive used 
as a noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He [Obidah] was pleased [ J that he had found 
means [ ] to unite pleasure with business, and [ ] to gain 
the rewards of diligence without suffering its fatigues. — 
Dr. Johnson. 

2. I am ready [ ] to die (a). 

3. He was curious [ ] to see what was going on. 

4. The soldiers were eager [ ] to engage in battle. 

MODELS FOR PARSING. 

(a) To die is a verb, etc. ; inf., pres., used as a noun, etc., obj., 
and governed by for understood. 

OTHERWISE. 

Supply the ellipsis thus : " I am ready [for this thing, namely] to 
die;" and parse to die as a noun, etc., obj., and in apposition with 
thing understood. — Eule I. 

Section 27. 

Ellipsis of the object of a preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I have not allowed myself, sir, to look beyond the 
union, to see what might lie hidden in the dark recess 
[(a)] behind [(6)].— Webster. 

(a) Supply "which is located." (b) Supply "the union." 



252 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

2. I have not accustomed myself to hang over the 
precipice of disunion, to see whether, with my short 
sight, I can fathom the abyss [(a)] below [(6)]. 

(a) Supply " which lies." (b) Supply " the precipice." 

3. Thou shalt not make unto thee any likeness of any 
thing that is in the heaven [(a)] above [(6)], or that is 
in the earth [(c)] beneath [(d)]. 

(a) Supply " which is." (b) Supply "the earth." (a) Supply 
" which is." (d) Supply " the heaven." 

Section 28, 

Ellipsis of the antecedent term of relation. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. The Creator has given to man dominion over the 
earth, and [(a)] over the fishes of the sea, and [ ] over 
the fowls of the air, and [ ] over every living thing that 
moves upon the earth. 

(a) Supply " dominion " in each pair of brackets. 

2. The promise to you and [ ] to your children. 

3. He sendeth rain on the just and [ ] on the unjust. 

4. And the swallow sings sweet from her nest [(a)] in 
the wall. 

(a) Supply " situated." 

Section 29. 

Ellipsis of the prepositions continued. 

MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES. 

1. Jocund was the balmy air with whistle, and [ ] 
laughter, and [] song. — Wilson. 

2. But when mankind increased in number, [ ] craft, 
and [ ] ambition, it became necessary to entertain con- 
ceptions of a more permanent dominion. — Blackstone. 

3. The slave appeared [ ] no way touched with his 
situation. 



ELLIPSIS. 253 

Section 30. 

Ellipsis of the conjunction and. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Blasphemy, [ ] falsehood, [ ] cheating, [ ] drunken- 
ness, [ ] quarreling, and murder are naturally connected 
with gambling. 

2. Maddened by fright and pain, lions, [ ] tigers, [ 
panthers, [ ] wolves, [ ] whole herds of the monsters of 
India and Africa, were inclosed in an impassable barrier 
of fire. 

3. They bounded, [ ] they fought, [ ] they screamed, 
] they tore ; [ ] they ran howling round and round the 

circle. 

Section 3L 

Ellipsis of the conjunction if. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. [ "] Should he be prevented from returning, they 
dreaded that grief would overpower the old man's spirits. 

2. [ ] Didest thou feel half the mountain that is on 
me, thou wouldest struggle with the martyr for his stake, 
and bless heaven for the flame which is not an everlast- 
ing flame. — Young. 

3. [ ] Were my brother alive, our mutual sympathy 
would be some alleviation. — Trans, from Sallust. 

Section 32. 

Ellipsis of the conjunction that. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He [Obidah] renewed his pace, though he suspected 
[ ] he w r as not gaining ground. — Dr. Johnson. 



254 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

2. J T is not enough [ ] no harshness gives offense ; 
The sound must be an echo to the sense. — Pope. 

3. I have often thought [ ] if the minds of men were 
laid open, we should see but little difference between that 
of a wise man and that of a fool. — Addison. 

Section 33. 

Ellipsis of ivords following the conjunction as. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I will marry a wife as beautiful as the houries 
[(a)]. — Dr. Johnson. 

(a) Supply " are beautiful." 

2. Make your country the home of the skillful, the 
fortunate, and the happy, as well as [(a)] tne asylum of 
the oppressed. — Patrick Henry. 

(a) Supply "you would make it." 

3. He [Fundanus] has lost a daughter who resembled 
him in her manners as well as [ ] in her person. 

Section 34. 

Ellipsis of ivords after the conjunction than. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. What we call fables, or parables, are no other [(a)] 
than allegories [(6)]. 

(a) Supply "thing." {b) Supply "are." 

2. He sought no other pleasure, for the remainder of 
life, than the converse of the wise and the gratitude of 
the good [(«)]. 

(a) Supply " afford." 

3. Truth is often wonderful ; even more wonderful 
than fiction [ ]. 



ELLIPSIS. 255 

4. You can not do better than to accept my offer [(a)]. 
(a) Supply "would be doing," and parse to accept as a noun, 

etc., and nom. to would be doing understood. — Rule VIII. 

5. To approach the land was scarcely less dangerous 
than [(a)] to remain in the raging sea around them. 

(a) Supply "it was dangerous," and parse to remain in the 
raging sea around them as a noun, etc., in the nom. case, 
and in apposition with it. — Rule I. 

Section 35. 

Ellipsis of the noun with which an infinitive or an infini- 
tive phrase used a's a noun is put in apposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. James is ambitious [ ] to excel. 2. Thomas is de- 
sirous [ ] to learn. 3. The children were eager [ ] to 
see the exhibition. 4. These two persons are ready [ 
to die for each other's preservation. 5. It is time [ ] to 
depart. 

Section 36. 

Ellipsis of the noun with which a sentence used as a noun 
is in apposition. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I was but too well assured [(a)] that Pythias would 
punctually return. — Fenelon . 

(a) Read thus : " I was but too well assured [of this thing, 
namely] that Pythias would punctually return ;" and parse that 
Pythias would punctually return as a noun in apposi- 
tion with thing understood. 

2. He studies [(a)] that he may improve. 
(a) Supply " with this object in view, namely." 

3. Children, you do not consider [ ], that though this 
may be sport to you, it is death to us. — L' Estrange. 



256 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Section 37. 

Ellipsis of the nominative absolute. 

EXAMPLES 

1. [(a)] Original and unaccommodating, the features 
of his [Pitt's] character had the hardihood of antiquity. 

(a) Supply "he being." 

2. [ | Overbearing and persuasive, his object was 
England; his ambition, fame. — Robertson. 

Section 38. 

Ellipsis of the subject of a present participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. [(«)] Properly speaking, there is no such thing as 
chance. 2. [ ] Admitting your premises, your conclu- 
sion does not follow. 3. [ ] Considering their means, 
their contributions were liberal. 

(a) Supply " we." 



ARTICLE XXIV. 



THE POSSESSIVE CASE. 

Section 1. 

Two or more jwssessives governed by the same noun. 

(a) Wlien the possessives refer conjointly to the thing pos- 
sessed. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. David and Jonathan's friendship was wonderful 
(a). 2. William and Mary's reign was prosperous. 3. 
Thomas and Henry's parents are dead. 

(a) David is a noun, etc., poss., and governed by friendship. — 



THE POSSESSIVE CASE. 257 

Rule II. The sign of possession is omitted, because the two pos- 
sessives David and Jonathan'' s refer conjointly to the same thing. — 
Rule II, Note 1. 

(b) When the possessives refer separately to the thing pos~ 



EXAMPLES. 

1. James's and George's boots fit them well (a). 2. 
Thomas's and Henry's parents were present. 3. Were 
Cain's and Abel's occupation the same? 4. This hat 
is either John's or James's. 

(a) James's and George's are nouns, etc., in the poss. case. 
The signs are used in each, because the possessives James's and 
George's refer separately to the thing possessed. — Rule II, Note 2. 

Section 2. 

Possessives in apposition. 
(a) When the governing noun is expressed. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I left the parcel at Smith the book-seller's store 
(a). 2. Herod married his brother Philip's wife. 3. 
Herodias asked for John the Baptist's head. 

(a) Smith is a noun, etc., in the poss. case, and governed by 
the noun store. — Rule II. The sign of possession is omitted, be- 
cause book-seller s, which is in apposition with Smith, is followed by 
the governing noun store. — Rule II, Note 3. 

(b) When the governing noun is understood. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I left the parcel at Smith's, the book-seller and 
stationer (a). 2. I reside at Lord Storm ont's, my old 
patron and benefactor. 3. These Psalms are David's, 
the sweet singer of Israel. 

(a) Smith's is a noun, etc., in the poss. case, and governed by 
store or house understood. — Rule II. 
P. M.— 22. 



258 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

Book-seller and stationer are nouns, etc., in the poss. 
case, in apposition with Smith's. — Kule I. The sign of possession 
is omitted according to Rule II, Note 4. 

(c) When a noun in the possessive denotes occupation, 
and is in apposition with a preceding noun or pronoun, 
the governing noun being understood. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Mr. Thompson's duty as a teacher is to instruct his 
pupils (a). 2. Your duty as a parent is to provide for 
the wants of your children. 3. John's duty as a son is 
to obey his father. 4. John's business as a farmer is to 
till the ground. 

(a) Teacher is a noun, etc. in the poss. case, and in apposition 
with Mr. Thompson. — Rule I. The sign of possession is omitted, 
according to Rule II, Note 5. 



ARTICLE XXV. 



A NOUN SINGULAR PRECEDED BY TWO OR 
MORE ADJECTIVES CONNECTED BY AND. 

Section 1, 

The noun being understood after all the adjectives except 
the last. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Intellectual \_(a)~] and moral culture ought to go 
hand in hand. They mutually assist each other. 

(a) Supply "culture," and parse ought as plural, to agree with 
the two subjects culture and culture taken together. — Rule IX, Note 
I. Also, parse tliey as being in the plural, to agree with its two 
antecedents culture and culture. — Rule VI, Note 1. 

2. A white [ ] and a black horse are grazing in the 



PRIMARY AND ATTRIBUTIVE OBJECTS. 259 

meadow. 3. Both civil [ ] and religious liberty are en- 
joyed by the American people. 4. Here are a gold [ ], 
a silver [ ], and a paper dollar. 5. An old [ ] and a 
young man were walking in the garden. 6. A large [ 
and a small tree are growing in my garden. 

Section 2. 

There being no ellipsis of the noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. A white and black horse is grazing in the pasture. 
2. A clear and calm day sometimes succeeds a cloudy 
and stormy night. 

Remark. — The repetition of the article indicates that two objects 
are meant ; and its non-repetition, that only one is meant. 



ARTICLE XXVI. 



PRIMARY AND ATTRIBUTIVE OBJECTS. 
Section 1. 

The attributive object a noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. They called him John (a). 2. They named him 
Henry. 3. The saints proclaim Thee King. 4. They 
elected him captain. 5. They voted it a nuisance. 6. 
The Turks style their emperor Sultan. 

(a) Him is a pronoun, etc., and is the primary object of called. — 
Rule III, Note 1. 

Jolim is a noun, etc., and is the attributive object of called. — 
Rule III. Note 1. 



260 THE PARSERS MANUAL. 

Section 2o 

An infinitive as attributive object 

EXAMPLES. 

1. I commanded him to go. 2. He ordered the servant 
to saddle the horse. 3. I requested him to lend me a 
book. 4. I saw him [to] go. 5. He ordered the horse 
to be saddled. 

(a) Him is a pronoun, etc., and is the primary object of com- 
manded. — Kule III, Note 1. 

To go is a verb, etc. ; inf., and the attributive object of com- 
manded, — Rule III, Note 2. 



ARTICLE XXVII. 



THE OBJECTIVE CASE AFTER PASSIVE 
VERBS. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. James was taught grammar (a). 2. He was asked 
a question. 3. They were refused admittance. 4. He 
was banished the realm. 5. We were denied the right. 

(a) ^rasmmar is a noun, etc. ; in the obj. case after the passive 
verb ivas taught. — Rule III, Note 3. 



ARTICLE XXVIII. 



INFINITIVES USED ATTRIBUTIVELY. 



EXAMPLES. 



1. He was urged to return. 2. They were seen to be 
agitated. 3. They were ordered to leave. 4. Then 



INFINITIVES, 261 

Agrippa said unto Paul. Thou art permitted to speak 

for thyself. 5. The sun seems to rise and set. 6. The 
cholera is known -to have originated in India i . 

To liave originated is a verb. etc. ; infinitive, etc. It 

is used attributively, and relate? to cholera as its subject. — Rule XI. 



ARTICLE XXIX. 



INFINITIVES FOLLOWING THE CORRELA- 
TIVES SO AS. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Thou wouldest certainly blush at thy barbarity, if 
thou hadst been so unfeeling as to laugh at or despise a 

miserable being who had lost one of his legs [ ]. 

2. The difficulties were so great as to deter him [ ]. 

3. No station is so high, no power so great, no char- 
acter so unblemished, a- to exempt men from the attacks 
of rashness, malice, or envy [ a)]„ 

Snpply " would require one's station to be high, one's power 
to be great, and one'- character to be unblemished.*' 



ARTICLE XXX. 



ENPTHrnVES PRECEDED BY THE COR- 
RELATIVES OTHER THAN. 



EXAMPLES. 



1. I left the place of my confinement with no other 
views than to pay to heaven the vows I had made, settle 



262 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 

my family concerns according to the rules of justice, and 
to bid adieu to my children, that I might die in peace 
[(a)]. — Trans, from Fenelon. 
(a) Supply " were my views." 

2. You can not do better than to accept my offer [(a)]. 
(a) Supply " would be doing well." 

3. The vanquished army could not do otherwise than 
to submit to the conditions imposed upon them by the 
victors [(a)]. 

(a) Supply " would be doing." 



ARTICLE XXXIo 



THE INTERJECTIONS. 
Section 1. 

Words properly classed as interjections. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Forbid it, O (a) Father of mercy ! 

(a) O is an interjection of calling. It has no grammatical con- 
nection with the other words of the sentence. — Kule XIV. 

2. O (a) let not thy heart despise me ! 

(a) O is an interjection expressing desire. It has no grammat- 
ical connection with the other words of the sentence. — Rule XIV. 

3. Ah no ! Achilles meets a shameful fate ; 

O, how unworthy of the brave and great! — Pope. 

4. Alas ! alas ! (a) that great city Babylon ! that 
mighty city ! for in one hour is thy judgment come. — 
Rev. xviii : 10. 

(a) Alas! is an interjection expressing grief. It has no gram- 
matical connection, etc. — Rule XIV. 



WORDS USED AS SUBSTITUTES. 263 

Section 2. 

Words of other parts of speech used as interjections. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Amazing! (a) What do I see and hear? 

(a) Amazing! is an adjective used as an interjection to express 
wonder. 

2. Hark ! (a) they whisper. 

(a) Hark! is a verb in the imperative mode used as an interjec- 
tion, and signifies listen. 

Section 3. 

Inter jectional phrases. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. "Dear me!" (a) said the fox; "[are they] coming 
this way?" 

(a) Dear me! is an interjectional phrase expressing surprise 
and alarm. 

2. Can gold gain friendship ? Impudence of hope ! 

3. Ah me ! the ground is gone on which we stood, 
Lorenzo. 



ARTICLE XXXII. 



WORDS USED AS SUBSTITUTES FOR 

SENTENCES. 



EXAMPLES. 



1. Do you hear me? Yes (a). 2. Have you found 
your pocket-book? Yes. 3. Have you seen John? No. 
4. Have you finished your work? No. 

(a) Yes is a substitute for the sentence / do hear you. 



264 THE PARSER'S MANUAL. 



ARTICLE XXXIII. 



THE USE OF PRESENT WILL, PAST WOULD, 
AS A PRINCIPAL VERB. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. Whom will ye that I shall release unto you? (<x). 

(a) "Will is a verb ; irreg., trans., indie, pres., 2d, plu., to agree 
with its subject ye. — Kule IX. 

That I shall release unto you whom is a noun, etc. ; 
obj., and governed by ivill. — Rule III. 

2. Now, at the feast the governor was wont to release 
unto them a prisoner whom they would [ ]. 

3. What will ye that I shall do unto you ? 



ARTICLE XXXIV. 



THE INFINITIVE USED ABSTRACTLY. 

EXAMPLES. 

1. He was ashamed of being seen to weep (a). 2. 
Being known to be dishonest, he was not trusted. 3. 
He did not wish to seem to be agitated. 

(a) To weep is a verb; reg., intrans., inf., pres., and is used 
abstractly. — Rule XI, Note 3. 



